WO2009133745A1 - Disposable absorptive article - Google Patents

Disposable absorptive article Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2009133745A1
WO2009133745A1 PCT/JP2009/056627 JP2009056627W WO2009133745A1 WO 2009133745 A1 WO2009133745 A1 WO 2009133745A1 JP 2009056627 W JP2009056627 W JP 2009056627W WO 2009133745 A1 WO2009133745 A1 WO 2009133745A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
temperature change
article
substance
change substance
fused
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2009/056627
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
健 井畑
麗 浅野
結城 堀江
Original Assignee
大王製紙株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2008119316A external-priority patent/JP5305725B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2008119317A external-priority patent/JP5502287B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2008143573A external-priority patent/JP4579313B2/en
Priority claimed from JP2008250839A external-priority patent/JP4528853B2/en
Application filed by 大王製紙株式会社 filed Critical 大王製紙株式会社
Priority to CN200980115121.8A priority Critical patent/CN102014831B/en
Publication of WO2009133745A1 publication Critical patent/WO2009133745A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61FFILTERS IMPLANTABLE INTO BLOOD VESSELS; PROSTHESES; DEVICES PROVIDING PATENCY TO, OR PREVENTING COLLAPSING OF, TUBULAR STRUCTURES OF THE BODY, e.g. STENTS; ORTHOPAEDIC, NURSING OR CONTRACEPTIVE DEVICES; FOMENTATION; TREATMENT OR PROTECTION OF EYES OR EARS; BANDAGES, DRESSINGS OR ABSORBENT PADS; FIRST-AID KITS
    • A61F13/00Bandages or dressings; Absorbent pads
    • A61F13/15Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators
    • A61F13/42Absorbent pads, e.g. sanitary towels, swabs or tampons for external or internal application to the body; Supporting or fastening means therefor; Tampon applicators with wetness indicator or alarm

Definitions

  • the conventional temperature change has a problem that both the degree of change and the change speed are insufficient for the amount of the temperature change substance used. For this reason, the conventional one has a low rate at which the wearer perceives and reports urination, for example, about 40% at most of disposable diapers for training containing cooling substances currently on the market. Then, the main subject of this invention is providing the disposable absorbent article which is excellent in temperature change efficiency, and can exhibit a larger temperature change faster.
  • the present inventors have obtained the following knowledge. That is, if the temperature-changing substance is simply contained in the absorber, urine held in the absorber without contacting the temperature-changing substance not only inhibits the temperature change but also the temperature-changing substance in the absorber. Even if the temperature change action due to is expressed, the temperature change is blocked by the heat insulating action inherently possessed by the absorber. In addition, when it is attempted to efficiently express the temperature change action by the temperature change substance, it seems to be desirable to arrange the temperature change substance at the urination site, but the urination site is the site where urine is supplied most continuously. The temperature change generated by the urine supplied earlier is weakened or canceled by the temperature of the urine supplied later. Moreover, these phenomena have an extremely large influence on the temperature change performance. The present invention has been made based on such knowledge.
  • ⁇ Invention of Claim 1> It has a front side portion that extends to the front side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and a rear side portion that extends to the rear side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article,
  • a disposable absorbent article comprising an absorbent portion in which an absorber is interposed between a liquid-permeable top sheet and a back sheet
  • the absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side.
  • the absorbent body has a pocket portion having a thickness of 0 to 50% of the surrounding area including a portion of 20% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and the front end of the pocket portion and the absorbent body Formed so that the distance from the front end of the product is 5 to 30% of the total length of the article,
  • a temperature change substance that cools or heats urine by contact with urine is disposed,
  • a disposable absorbent article characterized by that.
  • the temperature-changing substance causes endothermic reaction when dissolved in urine, cools urine, and has a solubility in 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C. of 30 g or more,
  • the basis weight of the temperature change substance in the pocket is 500 to 1000 g / m 2 ;
  • the total area of the pocket portion is 2500 to 8000 mm 2 .
  • the total amount of heat change that can occur in the absorber due to the temperature change material is 20 cal or more,
  • the calorie change per unit area of the portion having the temperature change substance is 1 cal / cm 2 or more.
  • the above-described effects of the present invention become more remarkable.
  • the temperature-changing substance is a substance that changes its temperature when dissolved in urine
  • the absorbent article of the present invention has a structure in which urine after sufficiently diffusing and moving contributes to temperature change, part of the temperature change substance in the pocket portion remains undissolved and holds the urine whose temperature has changed. be able to. Then, since the urine held in the temperature change substance slowly advances the dissolution of the temperature change substance thereafter, the temperature change is more reliably transmitted to the wearer.
  • the absorber includes 120 to 200 g / m 2 of hydrophilic fibers and 170 to 220 g / m 2 of superabsorbent polymer particles, and the content of the superabsorbent polymer is higher than the content of the hydrophilic fibers.
  • the superabsorbent polymer is disposed at the highest density compared to the other regions of the absorber.
  • the superabsorbent polymer When the superabsorbent polymer is densely arranged around the pocket, at least near the front end of the pocket corresponding to the wearer's abdomen, it absorbs and maintains the temperature-changed urine to diffuse, and around the wearer's abdomen It is preferable because it can be limited to
  • an excretion indicator is also used to inform the wearer that urination has occurred, but if the excretion indicator is provided so as to overlap the pocket of the absorber, a small amount of Urine is preferable because discoloration is good even in urine.
  • the temperature change substance has hygroscopicity, it is not excreted due to contact with moisture in the air during storage (humidity) or contact with moisture released from the wearer's sweat or body during use. The excretion indicator will not change color.
  • the pocket portion containing the temperature change substance so as to include the urination position, because a sufficient temperature change can be generated even when the amount of urine is small or large.
  • the absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side and 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the rear side.
  • the pocket portion is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the central area of the absorbent body, and the line width thereof is 5 to 10% of the total length of the article.
  • the central area extends from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side of the article. 15 to 35%, and 15 to 35% of the total length of the article on the rear side, extending along the center in the width direction of the article, and the width is 40 to 75% of the total width of the absorbent body.
  • the disposable absorbent article according to claim 5.
  • the temperature change substance If the temperature change substance is contained in the form of powder and non-fixed as in the prior art, the temperature change substance moves from a predetermined site during the distribution process or use of the product, and the urine against the temperature change substance There is a risk that the temperature change becomes insufficient due to insufficient supply or temperature change not being sufficiently transmitted to the body.
  • the temperature-changing substance so as not to have a particulate matter in a solid and freely movable state inside the absorbent article as described above, or to have only a small amount, Most of the temperature change material does not move. Therefore, an expected temperature change occurs.
  • a temperature change substance causes a temperature change by contact with moisture. Therefore, in order to increase the contact efficiency with moisture, to keep the moisture whose temperature has changed in a part closer to the skin, and to prevent the temperature changing substance from touching the skin directly, It is preferable to set it as the sheet
  • the temperature change substance By fusing the temperature change substance in the absorbent article in this manner, the temperature change substance is reliably held at a predetermined position and is difficult to move. Therefore, an expected temperature change occurs. Further, since the fused temperature change substance is crushed, the hardening due to the fusion of the temperature change substance is reduced. This form includes that a part of the temperature change substance is pulverized and dropped from the member to be fused.
  • fused means a state in which the temperature change substance is solidified after adhering to the target (absorber) in a molten state, and the solidified body is fixed to the target.
  • the temperature change substance is sandwiched between a front surface side member and a back surface side member positioned on the front surface side and the back surface side, respectively, and a part thereof is fused to the front surface side member and the back surface side member, and the remaining portion is the It is not fused to the front side member and the back side member,
  • the fused portion of the temperature change material forms a frame shape, and the non-fused temperature change material is enclosed in a portion surrounded by the frame-like fused portion,
  • the inner side of the frame-like fusion part fused to the front-side member and the rear-side member is surrounded by the front-side member and the rear-side member in the front-back direction, and the periphery is frame-like fusion. If it is surrounded by the part, the temperature change substance arranged on the inside can move only within the range of the frame-like fusion part even if it is not fused. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change substance is suppressed, and the desired temperature change occurs. Moreover, since the fusion part of the temperature change material is frame-shaped, it becomes much more flexible than the whole surface fusion, and it is possible to suppress hardening due to fusion of the temperature change material.
  • fusion means a state in which the temperature-changing substance is solidified after adhering to the object in a molten state, and the solidified body is fixed to the object.
  • frame shape includes a form in which the fusion part of the temperature change substance is completely continuous, and a form having a partial discontinuity in a range in which the movement of the temperature change substance is suppressed.
  • the molded piece obtained by compression molding the particulate temperature-change substance as described above moves through the gap between the members and the gap between the fibers as compared with the particulate one. hard. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change material can be suppressed by incorporating the molded piece of such a temperature change material in a state of being sandwiched between the front surface side member and the back surface side member.
  • the compression-molded piece of particles has a porous structure, the surface area, that is, the contact area with moisture is much larger than that of a simple solidified product of temperature-change substance particles, so that the temperature change efficiency is hardly reduced or If it drops, it will be less. Therefore, although the temperature change substance is difficult to move, a sufficient contact area with the moisture of the temperature change substance is ensured, so that a desired temperature change occurs.
  • the molded piece is formed by compression molding sugar alcohol particles having an average particle size of 200 to 600 ⁇ m and a bulk density of 0.50 to 0.70 g / cm 3 so that the bulk density is 0.80 to 1.10 g / cm 3.
  • the abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B are formed by laminating two sheet-like materials 12 and 12 as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5. Although it extends only to the edge of the waist opening WO, the outer sheet-like material 12 positioned on the outside wraps around the edge on the waist side of the inner sheet-like material 12 and is folded back to the inside. 12r is extended so that it may cover to the waist side edge part of the interior body 200, and it is being fixed to the opposing surface with the hot-melt-adhesive agent.
  • the sheet-like material 12 is not particularly limited as long as it can be joined by welding, but is preferably a nonwoven fabric.
  • the nonwoven fabric is not particularly limited as to what the raw fiber is.
  • a plurality of first elongate elastic elastic members 15 are vertically spaced along the width direction at a predetermined stretch rate so as to be continuous over the entire width direction at each of the upper and both sides in the width direction. It is fixed in the stretched state.
  • a part of the first, second and third elongated elastic elastic members 15, 16 and 19, or the elastic force acts over the entire width direction of the back side main body part 13 and the back side extension part 14. The whole can be provided across the interior body 200 from one side in the width direction to the other side.
  • the top sheet 30 has a property of transmitting liquid, and examples thereof include a porous or non-porous nonwoven fabric, a porous plastic sheet, and the like.
  • the nonwoven fabric is not particularly limited as to what the raw fiber is.
  • synthetic fibers such as olefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyesters and polyamides, recycled fibers such as rayon and cupra, natural fibers such as cotton, and mixed fibers and composite fibers using two or more of them. Etc. can be illustrated.
  • the nonwoven fabric may be manufactured by any processing.
  • Examples of the processing method include known methods such as a spunlace method, a spunbond method, an SMS method, a thermal bond method, a melt blown method, a needle punch method, an air through method, and a point bond method.
  • a nonwoven fabric processed by the spunbond method or the SMS method is suitable in terms of excellent balance between thinness and strength in order to make it easy to detect temperature changes from the surface side, and a nonwoven fabric processed by the air-through method is low. Even the basis weight is suitable because it absorbs quickly and has a smooth feeling.
  • the top sheet 30 may be composed of a single sheet or a laminated sheet obtained by bonding two or more sheets. Similarly, the top sheet 30 may be composed of a single sheet or a laminate of two or more sheets in the planar direction.
  • the thickness is about 0.1 to 3 mm, particularly 0.5 mm or less, and the basis weight is about 10 to 40 g / m 2 , especially 25 g / m 2 or less. It is preferable because it has excellent heat conductivity from the back side to the skin.
  • both side portions of the surface sheet 30 pass between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 to the back side of the absorbent element 50 to prevent liquid penetration. Therefore, it is preferable to adhere to the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 with a hot melt adhesive or the like. Thereby, the effect that the rigidity of the both sides of the interior body 200 is improved is also obtained.
  • the second sheet 44 (see FIG. 20C) having a higher liquid permeation rate than the top sheet 30 can be provided in order to quickly transfer the liquid that has passed through the top sheet 30 to the absorber.
  • This second sheet 44 not only quickly transfers the liquid to the absorbent body and enhances the absorption performance by the absorbent body, but also prevents the “reversed” phenomenon of the absorbed liquid from the absorbent body, and the top sheet 30 is always dried. It can be made into the state which carried out.
  • the second sheet 44 can be omitted.
  • Examples of the second sheet 44 include the same material as the top sheet 30, spunlace, spunbond, SMS, pulp nonwoven fabric, a mixed sheet of pulp and rayon, point bond, or crepe paper.
  • an air-through nonwoven fabric is preferable because it is bulky.
  • the resin used for the core may be polypropylene (PP), but polyester (PET) having high rigidity is preferable.
  • Basis weight is preferably 20 ⁇ 80g / m 2, more preferably 25 ⁇ 60g / m 2.
  • the thickness of the raw fiber of the nonwoven fabric is preferably 2.2 to 10 dtex.
  • the second sheet 44 may be provided over the entire width in addition to being arranged in the center shorter than the width of the absorber 56.
  • the length of the second sheet 44 in the longitudinal direction may be the same as the length of the absorbent body 56 or may be within a short length range centered on the region that receives the liquid.
  • the material of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is not particularly limited.
  • the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is substantially made of an olefin-based resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, a laminated nonwoven fabric obtained by laminating a nonwoven fabric on a polyethylene sheet, or a waterproof film.
  • Non-woven fabrics that ensure liquid impermeability in this case, a liquid-impermeable sheet is composed of a waterproof film and a non-woven fabric).
  • materials having liquid impermeability and moisture permeability which have been used and used in recent years from the viewpoint of preventing stuffiness, can also be exemplified.
  • an inorganic filler is kneaded in an olefin resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, and the sheet is formed, and then stretched in a uniaxial or biaxial direction.
  • an olefin resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene
  • the microporous sheet obtained in this way can be given.
  • a sheet that is liquid-impermeable without using a film can also be used as the liquid-impermeable sheet 11.
  • the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is preferably extended to both sides of the side surface 30 of the absorbent element 50 by wrapping around both sides of the absorbent element 50 in order to improve leakage prevention. Thereby, the effect that the rigidity of the both sides of the interior body 200 is improved is also obtained.
  • the width of this extended portion is suitably about 5 to 20 mm on the left and right.
  • the inner surface or the outer surface of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 may be designed by printing or coloring. Further, a printed or colored design sheet, which is a separate member from the crotch outer sheet 12M, may be attached to the outside of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11. Further, an excretion indicator 80 whose color changes by contact with moisture can be provided inside the liquid-impermeable sheet 11.
  • the excretion indicator 80 is preferably provided between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the absorber 56, and is preferably provided over 30% or more, particularly 60% or more of the entire length of the absorber 56, and at least the width of the absorber 56. It is preferable to be provided along the center of the direction.
  • the excretion indicator 80 may be provided on either the absorbent body 56 side or the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 side of the packaging sheet 58. Further, another member provided with the excretion indicator 80 may be disposed between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the absorber 56. It is preferable that the excretion indicator 80 is provided so as to overlap with a pocket portion 57 of the absorber 56 described later, because discoloration is good even with a small amount of body fluid.
  • the excretion indicator 80 is preferably overlapped with the pocket portion 57, and the pocket portion 57 is provided so as to penetrate the absorbent body 56 in the vertical direction (the packaging sheet 58 exists). May also be preferred.
  • the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are belt-like members extending along the both sides of the interior body 200 over the entire front-rear direction, blocking urine and soft stool that travel along the top sheet 30 in the lateral direction and prevent side leakage. It is provided to prevent this.
  • barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are provided double on the left and right sides of the interior body 200.
  • the inner barrier cuff 61 stands obliquely from the side of the interior body 200 toward the center in the width direction
  • the outer barrier cuff 60 is in the width direction of the inner barrier cuff 61.
  • the outer side portion is provided so as to stand upright from the side of the interior body 200, the base side portion stands obliquely toward the center in the width direction, and the tip side portion from the intermediate portion stands obliquely outward in the width direction.
  • the inner barrier cuff 61 folds the belt-like barrier sheet 62 having a length equal to the length in the front-rear direction of the interior body 200 in the width direction and folds it into two. Between them, a plurality of elongated elastic elastic members 63 are fixed along the longitudinal direction at intervals in the width direction. The elongated elastic elastic member 63 is not fixed to the barrier sheet 62 at the front and rear ends, and is fixed so that the barrier cuff extends and contracts in the middle part.
  • the barrier sheet 62 is made of a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (SS, SSS, etc.), SMS nonwoven fabric (SMS, SSMMS, etc.), a melt-blown nonwoven fabric having excellent uniformity and concealment, and water repellent with silicon as necessary.
  • a treated product can be suitably used, and the fiber basis weight is preferably about 10 to 30 g / m 2 .
  • the elongated elastic elastic member 63 rubber thread or the like can be used.
  • the thickness is preferably 420 to 1120 dtex, and more preferably 620 to 940 dtex.
  • the elongation at the time of fixation is preferably 150 to 350%, more preferably 200 to 300%.
  • a waterproof film can be interposed between the barrier sheets folded in two.
  • the arrangement position of the elongated elastic elastic member 63 in the middle is preferably in the range of 30 to 70% of the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (length in the width direction of the protruding portion). In the infant paper diaper, the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 is preferably about 15 to 35 mm.
  • the end of the inner barrier cuff 61 opposite to the folded portion in the width direction is an attachment portion (inner attachment portion) 65 fixed to the back surface of the side edge of the interior body 200.
  • the portion is a protruding portion 66 (a portion on the folded portion side and corresponding to the inner protruding portion) protruding from the mounting portion 65, and both ends in the front-rear direction of the protruding portion 66 are hot melt adhesive on the surface of the surface sheet 30.
  • a front-rear fixing portion 67 by heat sealing, and a middle portion in the front-rear direction is an unfixed free portion (inner free portion), and an elongated elastic member 63 along the front-rear direction is fixed to the free portion in an extended state.
  • the outer barrier cuff 60 also has basically the same structure as the inner barrier cuff 61, but its attachment portion (outer attachment portion) 68 is an attachment portion 65 of the inner barrier cuff 61 on the back side of the interior body 200. Further, both ends in the front-rear direction of the projecting portion (outer projecting portion) 69 pass from the mounting portion 68 to the side of the interior body 200, and are fixed to the outer surface of the inner barrier cuff 61 on the center side in the width direction.
  • the inner barrier cuff 61 also has a structure in which the tip of the inner protruding portion is folded outward in the width direction, specifically, not more than 1/2 of the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (width direction length of the protruding portion), If it is preferably 1/3 or less, a structure in which the tip side portion is folded back in the width direction and fixed to the base portion side portion similarly to the outer barrier cuff 61 may be adopted.
  • the number of the elongated elastic elastic members 63 provided in the free part (outer free part) of the outer barrier cuff 60 is preferably 2-6, and more preferably 3-5.
  • the arrangement interval 60d is suitably 3 to 10 mm. If comprised in this way, in the range which has arrange
  • the elongated elastic elastic member 63 may be disposed not only at the distal end side but also at the base side.
  • the elongated elastic elastic member 63 disposed on the outer barrier cuff 60 has the same thickness and elongation rate as the inner barrier cuff 61, but the thickness is the same as or larger than that of the inner barrier cuff 61, and the elongation rate is the inner barrier cuff 61. The same or lower than that of 61 is preferred.
  • the front-rear direction length L6 of the front-rear fixing portion 67 of the protruding portions 66, 69 is preferably formed so that the inner barrier cuff 61 is the same as or shorter than the outer barrier cuff 60, and is elongated in the barrier cuffs 60, 61.
  • the length of the elastic stretch member 63 in the front-rear direction is preferably formed so that the inner barrier cuff 61 is the same as or longer than the outer barrier cuff 60.
  • the barrier cuff is folded and fixed to the surface side substantially only at both ends in the front-rear direction, in the crotch part where the restriction to the center in the width direction by the front-rear fixing part 67 does not sufficiently act.
  • the outer barrier cuff 60 and the inner barrier cuff 61 both stand up outward in the width direction, and the pocket formed by the inner barrier cuff 61 becomes wider.
  • the linear root fixing part is positioned over 5 mm in the width direction from the side edge on the surface side, the barrier cuff rises toward the center in the width direction also in the crotch part, and the pocket formed by the inner barrier cuff 61 is narrow Therefore, it is not preferable.
  • a position of 0 to 20 mm from the side edge of the interior body 200 is appropriate, but it may be located beyond 20 mm.
  • the fixing target of the attachment portions 68 and 65 of the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 can be an appropriate member such as the surface sheet 30, the liquid-impermeable sheet 11, and the absorbent element 50 in the interior body 200.
  • the other barrier cuff can be fixed to the interior body 200 via the one barrier cuff.
  • the contraction force of the elongated elastic elastic member 63 acts so as to bring the both ends in the front-rear direction closer, but the both ends in the front-rear direction among the protruding parts 66 and 69 do not stand up. However, only the free part stands up against the body side as shown in FIG. 3.
  • the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 stand up so as to open outward in the width direction at the crotch portion and the vicinity thereof.
  • the barrier cuffs 60, 61 come into contact with the legs around the surface, and the fit is improved.
  • the inner and rear barrier cuffs 61 are restricted by the front and rear fixing part 67 so that the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 do not open outward in the width direction.
  • the lower half of the outer barrier cuff 60 is also erected in the same manner, it is possible to surely prevent the abdomen and the back from leaking from both sides of the interior body 200.
  • the front and rear fixing portions 67 of the protruding portion 66 of the inner barrier cuff 61 are not folded back, and the front and rear fixing portions 67 of the protruding portion 68 of the outer barrier cuff 60 are folded outward.
  • 61 is maintained between the inner and outer free parts, and the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60, 61 are securely raised at a wide interval, and each fits around the leg, providing excellent leakage prevention. It will be.
  • the standing height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (the length in the width direction of the protruding portion 66 in the unfolded state).
  • W5 is preferably 10 to 50 mm, particularly preferably 15 to 35 mm
  • the standing height of the outer barrier cuff 60 (length in the width direction of the protruding portion 69 in the unfolded state) W6 is 15 to 60 mm, particularly 20 to 40 mm. Is preferred.
  • the separation distance W4 between the tips in a state where the inner barrier cuff 61 is tilted to the surface of the top sheet 30 is preferably 60 to 170 mm, particularly 70 to 120 mm.
  • the distance W3 between the innermost folds is preferably 60 to 190 mm, particularly 70 to 140 mm. Unlike the illustrated embodiment, only one of the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 can be provided.
  • the absorption element 50 of this example has the absorber 56 and the packaging sheet 58 which wraps this absorber 56 whole, the packaging sheet 58 can also be abbreviate
  • the absorber 56 can be formed of an aggregate of fibers.
  • the fiber assembly preferably has hydrophilicity, and a tow (fiber bundle) of synthetic fibers such as cellulose acetate is opened as needed in addition to those obtained by stacking short fibers such as cotton pulp and synthetic fibers. Filament aggregates obtained by fibering can also be used.
  • the fiber basis weight can be, for example, about 120 to 200 g / m 2 when stacking cotton-like pulp or short fibers, and about 30 to 120 g / m 2 for filament aggregates, for example. Can do.
  • the fineness in the case of synthetic fibers is, for example, 1 to 16 dtex, preferably 1 to 10 dtex, and more preferably 1 to 5 dtex.
  • the length in the front-rear direction of the absorber front end portion 56F is L1
  • the length in the front-rear direction at the overlapping portion between the absorber 56 and the ventral exterior sheet 12F is L2
  • the length of the absorber rear end portion 56B is The length in the direction is L3, the length in the front-rear direction at the overlapping portion of the absorber 56 and the backside exterior sheet 12B is L4, the minimum width of the constricted portion 56N is W1, the width of the absorber front end portion 56F and the rear of the absorber When the width of the end portion 56B is W2, it is preferable that the end portion 56B is configured to satisfy the following expressions (1) to (4).
  • the absorber 56 does not exist in the vicinity of the attachment portion 65 of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 in the crotch portion. Therefore, the degree of freedom of movement of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 increases, and the barrier cuffs 60, 61 Is easy to open outward in the width direction, and it is easy to hit the skin with the surface, and the followability of the fit surface to the movement of the leg is improved.
  • the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 is stabilized with this as a base point (fulcrum).
  • a portion extending from the front and rear sides to the crotch portion is a displacement portion in which the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are opened outward from the posture in which the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 stand up inward in the width direction with reference to both side edges in the width direction.
  • the posture change of 60, 61 is supported by the absorber 56 that exists up to the side of the interior body 200, and the overall standing shape of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 is stabilized.
  • the degree of freedom of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 becomes too high in the crotch part, and there is a possibility that a gap is easily formed around the leg, and both the front and rear sides of the crotch part
  • the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 may become unstable.
  • the constricted portion becomes too small, the degree of freedom of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 is lowered, which is not preferable.
  • Superabsorbent polymer particles It is preferable to disperse and hold superabsorbent polymer particles throughout the absorber 56.
  • Superabsorbent polymer particles include “powder” in addition to “particles”.
  • particle diameter of the superabsorbent polymer particles those used in this type of absorbent article can be used as they are, and those having a particle size of 1000 ⁇ m or less, particularly 150 to 400 ⁇ m are desirable.
  • the material of the superabsorbent polymer particles can be used without any particular limitation, but those having a water absorption of 40 g / g or more are suitable.
  • Superabsorbent polymer particles include starch, cellulose and synthetic polymers, such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and sodium carboxymethylcellulose cross-link. Or an acrylic acid (salt) polymer can be used.
  • starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and sodium carboxymethylcellulose cross-link.
  • an acrylic acid (salt) polymer can be used.
  • shape of the superabsorbent polymer particles a commonly used granular material is suitable, but other shapes can also be used.
  • the superabsorbent polymer one integrated with an antibacterial substance can be used.
  • zeolite particles obtained by substituting some or all of the ion-exchangeable ions in the zeolite with silver ions (hereinafter referred to as antibacterial deodorant zeolite) are contained in the superabsorbent polymer or antibacterial.
  • Antibacterial deodorant superabsorbent polymer particles obtained by adhering deodorant zeolite particles to the surface of superabsorbent polymer particles by static electricity are suitable.
  • the superabsorbent polymer particles those having a water absorption rate of 40 seconds or less are preferably used. When the water absorption speed exceeds 40 seconds, so-called reversion in which the liquid supplied into the absorber 56 returns to the outside of the absorber 56 is likely to occur.
  • the overlap width 58W of the joint is it is preferable that the arrangement region of the temperature change substance 40 is narrower than the width 40W and has a dimension of 40 mm or less, particularly 20 mm or less. Even if it is made narrow like this, the superabsorbent polymer particles will not escape for the above reasons.
  • the seam of the packaging sheet 58 is also preferably formed near the side so as not to include the center in the width direction in contact with the urination port. In particular, it is preferable that the overlapping portion of the joint sheet of the packaging sheet 58 on the body side does not overlap with a portion having a temperature change substance described later.
  • a crotch outer sheet 12M exposed on the outer surface of the product is provided on the back side of the inner body 200.
  • the material of the crotch outer sheet 12M the same material as the abdominal outer sheet 12F and the back outer sheet 12B can be used, but a material containing a higher-strength material or a deodorant, etc.
  • a material different from the exterior sheet 12F and the back-side exterior sheet 12B may be used.
  • the crotch outer sheet 12M wraps around from the side in the width direction to the side of the body and is bonded and fixed to the outer surface of the barrier sheet 62 with a hot melt adhesive or the like, the rigidity of both sides of the interior body 200 is improved.
  • a sheet having high rigidity (roughness) as the crotch outer sheet 12M.
  • a sheet having a bending resistance measured by the Clark method (JISL1096 C method) and the sum of the MD direction and the CD direction of the sheet of 100 mm or more, preferably 150 mm or more may be used.
  • the pocket portion 57 in the illustrated example is within the range of 0 to 40% of the article total length L6 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side, and the longitudinal length 57L is 10 to 20% of the article full length L6.
  • the width 57W is provided to be 25 to 60% of the entire width W2 of the absorber 56. It is preferable that the temperature change substance 40 is provided only in the pocket portion 57 of the absorber 56 as shown in the illustrated example from the viewpoint of not impairing the diffusibility of urine and cost-effectiveness. Can also be provided.
  • the temperature change material 40 is preferably provided uniformly throughout the pocket portion 57, but the amount may vary depending on the site.
  • the temperature change substance 40 is in contact with urine and absorbs or releases heat by heat of dissolution, heat of hydration, heat of reaction, etc., and cools or heats urine.
  • Examples of the temperature change substance 40 that absorbs heat by dissolution in urine include hydrated salts such as sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, sodium sulfate, sodium thiosulfate, and sodium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, potassium nitrate, ammonium chloride, potassium chloride, nitric acid
  • hydrated salts such as sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, sodium sulfate, sodium thiosulfate, and sodium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, potassium nitrate, ammonium chloride, potassium chloride, nitric acid
  • anhydrous salts such as sodium, sugar alcohols such as urea, xylitol and sorbitol.
  • the solubility in 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C. is 30 g or more, particularly 50 g or more. Those are preferred.
  • heat amount change of 20 cal / g or more is preferable, and what produces the calorie
  • heat amount change per unit area is 1 cal / cm ⁇ 2 > or more.
  • the excretion indicator 80 overlaps with the pocket part 57 as described above, in particular in the form in which the excretion indicator 80 overlaps with the pocket part 57 provided so as to penetrate the absorber 56 in the vertical direction, the moisture in the air during storage Due to contact with (humidity) or contact with moisture from the wearer's sweat or body in use, the excretion indicator may be discolored even though it is not excreted.
  • the temperature-changing substance 40 is a hygroscopic substance, for example, a substance having a high water solubility and a large surface area as described above (particularly, particulate sorbitol or xylitol is preferable). And the above-mentioned unexpected discoloration of the excretion indicator can be prevented.
  • the pocket portion 57 having a sufficiently large size is located substantially in the wearer's abdomen or lower abdomen, and the wearer's abdomen or lower abdomen bulges relatively on the body surface. It is easy to approach the temperature change part in the pocket part 57, and the temperature change in the pocket part 57 is easily transmitted to the wearer.
  • the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 is located on the rear side with respect to the article longitudinal direction center CL from the position of 25 to 45% of the article total length L6 on the front side with respect to the article longitudinal direction center CL. It is also preferable that the width is extended to the position of 20 to 40% of the total length L6 of the article along the center in the width direction of the article and 25 to 60% of the total width W2 of the absorbent body 56. In this embodiment, since the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 extends so as to include the urination position, there is an advantage that a sufficient temperature change can be generated even when the amount of urine is small or large. .
  • the pocket portion 57 in the illustrated example is provided in a rectangular shape, it can be formed in an appropriate shape such as a triangular shape within the above size range. Others are basically the same as the above embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.
  • the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the central region 55 of the absorber 56, and the line width 57B is about 5 to 10% of the total length L6 of the article. It is also preferable that In this case, the central region 55 extends along the center in the width direction of the article by 15 to 35% of the article total length L6 on the front side and 15 to 35% of the article full length L6 on the rear side from the article longitudinal center CL.
  • the width is preferably 40 to 75% of the entire width W2 of the absorber 56.
  • the thickness of the packaging sheet 58 0.05 to 0.2 mm.
  • the weight of the packaging sheet 58 5 to 25 g / m 2 .
  • Type of temperature change substance 40 A substance that causes an endothermic reaction when dissolved in urine and cools urine. Solubility of temperature changing substance 40 (for 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C.): 30 g or more, in particular 50 g or more.
  • Total area of the pocket portion 57 2500 to 8000 mm 2 .
  • Temperature change substances basis weight in the pocket portion 57 (. Divided by the total area of the pocket portion the total amount of the temperature changing substance other the same.): 500 ⁇ 1000g / m 2.
  • Example 1 A pants-type disposable diaper having the structure shown in FIGS. 1 to 10 was produced. Detailed specifications are as follows.
  • Liquid-permeable surface sheet 30 an air-through nonwoven fabric composed of PE / PP composite fibers having a thickness of 2 mm and a basis weight of 25 g / m 2 .
  • Packaging sheet 58 crepe paper having a thickness of 1 mm and a basis weight of 15 g / m 2 .
  • the front end part is separated from the front end part of the absorber 56 by 75 mm in a rectangular range with a total length of 70 mm and a total width of 40 mm. The area is 2800 mm 2 .
  • the basis weight of the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket part 57 500 g / m 2 .
  • Composition of absorber 56 Pulp fiber and superabsorbent polymer particles (dispersed uniformly in the thickness direction of absorber 56 and in the direction perpendicular thereto). Pulp weight in the absorbent body 56: 110 g / m 2 .
  • the basis weight of the superabsorbent polymer in the absorber 56 160 g / m 2 .
  • Dimensions of absorber 56 From a position of 205 mm on the front side to the position of 190 mm on the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and from a position of 70 mm on the left side to a position of 70 mm on the right side with respect to the center in the width direction.
  • the area is 55,300 mm 2 .
  • Type of temperature change substance 40 Sorbitol (The heat of dissolution is minus 26 cal / g, “Sorbit” manufactured by Towa Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.) Solubility of temperature changing substance 40 (for 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C.): 70 g.
  • Example 1 according to the present invention has a faster temperature decrease rate and a lower minimum temperature than Example 2, and can maintain the minimum temperature for a sufficient time. there were.
  • the particulate temperature change substance 40 is heated and melted and solidified to be arranged in a solid state, and the temperature change substance 40 has a particulate matter in a state where it can freely move. It is also possible to have only a small amount or not to move the majority.
  • fusing point of 70 degreeC or more so that the temperature change substance 40 may not melt
  • examples of such a temperature change substance 40 include sorbitol and xylitol having a melting point of about 95 to 110 ° C. (varies depending on purity).
  • a material obtained by heating and melting the temperature change material 40 is fused and fixed to a member adjacent to the periphery, so that the temperature change material 40 does not move, and the temperature change reliably occurs in the fusion region (for example, the crotch portion).
  • the function comes to be demonstrated.
  • part of the temperature change substance 40 can also anticipate the effect as an adhesion part for adhering and fixing the upper and lower members.
  • the fusion site of the temperature change substance 40 is not particularly limited as long as it is a member adjacent to the periphery, but in the illustrated example, it can be at least one of the absorber 56 and the packaging sheet 58.
  • the fusion site is preferably the entire inside of the pocket portion 57, but can also be a part of the temperature change substance 40, when the temperature change substance 40 is contained outside the pocket portion 57.
  • the temperature changing substance can be fused to the adjacent member.
  • the temperature change substance 40 As a method of fusing the temperature change substance 40 to the fusion target such as the absorber 56, the temperature change substance 40 having an appropriate shape such as a particle (including powder) or short fiber is formed on the upper surface of the fusion target member. After being placed on a predetermined part or contained in a predetermined part inside the fusion target member (including when sandwiched between a plurality of members), the temperature change substance 40 is heated together with the fusion target member, and the temperature change substance It is possible to use a method in which only the temperature 40 is melted and attached to the fibers of the member to be fused, and then cooled to solidify the temperature change substance 40 (first method).
  • the temperature change material in the form of particles smaller than that before melting or a plurality of melted temperatures are obtained.
  • the bulky temperature change material 40 in which the change materials are integrated is attached to many places, or these are continuously attached to the temperature change material 40 such as a film or a skeleton.
  • a melt of the temperature change substance 40 is applied to a predetermined part of the member to be fused using a nozzle or the like.
  • a method of cooling and solidifying can also be used (second method).
  • the temperature change substance 40 when the temperature change substance 40 is contained in the fusion target member, the temperature change substance 40 such as particulates is mixed with the manufacturing raw material (fiber or the like) of the fusion target member.
  • the particulate temperature change material 40 is applied to the fusion target member more vigorously than the free fall by giving an initial velocity. Accordingly, the temperature change substance 40 can be allowed to enter the fusion target member.
  • the heating means in the first method is not particularly limited, but for example, the means shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 can be employed.
  • the means shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 utilize an air-through dryer that heats by passing high-temperature air.
  • the means shown in FIG. 16 after the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged at a predetermined portion is conveyed by the belt conveyor 301 and heated by hot air 302 that is passed in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance surface. In the same manner, cooling is performed by the wind 303 that is passed in a direction orthogonal to the conveying surface.
  • 17 (a) and 17 (b) is a suction roll 311 in which a fusion target member 300 in which a temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion is installed in a heating chamber 310 to which high-temperature air is supplied. It is heated by hot air 312 passed from the outside to the inside of the suction roll 311 while being wound around and then cooled by being wound around and transferred to a cooling roll 313 installed outside the heating chamber 310. is there.
  • the heating means shown in FIG. 18 wraps and transfers the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion around the heating roll 320, thereby bringing the heat of the heating roll 320 into contact with the temperature change substance. It heats from one side.
  • the heating means shown in FIG. 19 passes the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion between a pair of rolls 330, 331, 340, 341, at least one of which is a heating roll, The heat of the heating roll is transmitted to the temperature change substance by contact and heated.
  • both rolls 330 and 331 are smooth rolls with smooth surfaces and no irregularities are formed on the fusion target member 300, as shown in FIG.
  • any one of the rolls 340 may be an embossing roll having a predetermined pattern of unevenness on the surface, and the unevenness may be formed on one surface of the fusion target member 300.
  • the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340 is formed only in the region where the temperature change substance is fused, and only that region is heated. Since the fusion part is formed only in the region corresponding to the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340, the temperature change substance 40 may be arranged in a wider range than the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340. Thus, if the method of partially heating the fusion target member 300 is used, it is not necessary to arrange the temperature change substance 40 only in a predetermined region of the fusion target member 300.
  • the entire surface of the fusion target member 300 It is also possible to partially form the fused portion by disposing the temperature change substance 40 and heating only a predetermined region. Further, if the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340 has a plurality of heights, it is possible to separately form a portion where the temperature change material 40 is fused thickly and a portion where the temperature change material 40 is thinly fused.
  • the heating and melting of the temperature change material 40 in the first method is performed not only at the time of manufacturing the member to be fused, but also at an appropriate stage in the subsequent manufacturing process, for example, the assembly completion state of the interior body 200 (before assembly to the product state). Alternatively, after the assembly to the product state is completed, the inner body 200 and the entire diaper can be performed. As a heating method in this case, for example, the means shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 described above can be applied.
  • the surface-change material 40 fused to the member to be fused in the first method has a small surface area because it is once melted and liquefied and then solidified. Therefore, since the contact area with the urine in the temperature change substance 40 becomes small, the temperature change speed is suppressed and the sustainability is improved. However, if the rate of temperature change is uniformly reduced, the wearer may have difficulty perceiving the temperature change. Therefore, a particulate matter having a low bulk density is used as the temperature change substance 40, and not all of the particulate matter is melted, but a part thereof is melted to form a solid having a high bulk density, and the rest is left as a particulate matter having a low bulk density.
  • the particle-like temperature change substance 40 has the same particle size, the lower the bulk density, the larger the surface area and the higher the contact efficiency with urine, and thus the temperature change speed becomes faster. This tendency is particularly remarkable when the temperature change substance 40 is dissolved in urine to cause a temperature change. Therefore, as described above, when only a part of the temperature change substance 40 is melted, the temperature change substance 40 that maintains the particulate state has a quick temperature change action, and the melted and solidified temperature change substance 40 has a temperature change action. Therefore, a temperature change having both fast and slow effects can be obtained.
  • the residual ratio of the particulate matter is suitably about 30 to 70% by weight. Further, from the viewpoint of preventing the movement of the temperature change substance 40, the remaining proportion of the particulate matter is suitably about 0 to 50% by weight. Therefore, the residual ratio of the particulate matter is preferably 30 to 50% by weight.
  • the particulate temperature change substance 40 having a low bulk density porous particles such as granules, particles having many surface irregularities, and particles having fine pores on the surface or inside thereof are suitable.
  • the degree of the bulk density may be determined as appropriate, but is preferably 50% or less of the true density (having a void (space) of 50% or more with respect to the apparent volume).
  • the true density is so 1.50 g / cm 3, preferably bulk density is 0.75 g / cm 3 or less, more preferably 0.50 ⁇ 0.70g / cm 3, 0.55 ⁇ 0 .65 g / cm 3 is particularly preferred.
  • the particle size is large, the apparent bulk density is small, but the surface area is not large. Therefore, when the particulate temperature change material 40 is used, the average particle size (JIS K 1474-2007 median diameter) is 200 to 600 ⁇ m. It is preferable that
  • the temperature change substance 40 can be fused inside the diaper or to a member constituting the diaper, but only by this, the fused part becomes hard, the wearing feeling becomes hard, and the body fits. The nature is also reduced. Therefore, the following softening means are combined.
  • the first means applies mechanical pressure to the portion including the fused portion of the temperature change material 40 to break the fused temperature change material 40.
  • Such a treatment is preferable because a continuous treatment can be performed by pressing the member to be fused between the rolls.
  • the pressurization may be accompanied by heating, but it is preferable to pressurize without heating because the temperature change substance is difficult to break.
  • the arrangement of the pressurizing portions 45 can be determined as appropriate, and can be a staggered pattern as shown in FIG. 14B in addition to a matrix as shown in FIG. A part of the temperature change material 40 crushed and subdivided by the pressurization is released from the fused member and can move freely inside the diaper.
  • the amount of free substances (particulate matter) is small, specifically, about 0 to 30% by weight, particularly 0 to 10% by weight, based on the whole temperature change substance 40.
  • the particulate matter in a state where it can freely move in the diaper is granular or powder as long as it is not fixed to the member constituting the diaper and can be freely moved at least in the plane direction. It is not limited to the shape, and includes an appropriate shape such as a short fiber shape or a block shape.
  • the individual “particles” have a maximum length of 30 mm or less and a maximum weight of 1 g or less when the length is measured in an arbitrary direction. Of course, if the “particles” are too large, there is a sense of incongruity when worn, so the maximum length is actually 10 mm or less and the maximum weight is about 0.2 g or less.
  • the shape of the fused portion of the temperature change substance 40 is rectangular in the illustrated example, but may be a rhombus, triangle, or circle.
  • the arrangement of the fusion parts of the temperature change material 40 is a matrix in the illustrated example, but may be an arbitrary arrangement such as a staggered pattern.
  • the interval between the fused portions of the temperature change material 40 can be determined as appropriate, but is preferably about 3 to 15 mm in both the front-rear direction and the width direction.
  • the width 48 in the intermittent direction of each temperature change substance 40 is preferably about 3 to 40 mm, particularly about 5 to 10 mm.
  • the interval 47 between the fused portions of the temperature change material 40 is too wide or the width 48 is too narrow, the amount of the temperature change material 40 may be insufficient, and the interval 47 is too narrow or the width 48 is too wide. Then, there is a risk that flexibility will be insufficient.
  • the degree of softening by these methods can be adjusted as appropriate, but the rigidity of the portion having the fused portion of the temperature change substance 40 in the diaper is 15 to 50 cN / 50 mm, particularly 20 to 35 cN / 50 mm. preferable.
  • the rigidity of the portion of the temperature change material 40 that does not have the fused portion is preferably about 1 to 25 cN / 50 mm, particularly about 5 to 15 cN / 50 mm.
  • the difference in rigidity between the portion having and not having is preferably about 5 to 20 cN / 50 mm.
  • the rigidity means bending rigidity (rigidity), and is measured according to the following method in accordance with JIS K-7171 (plastic-bending rigidity test method).
  • the test piece is prepared by removing the elastic elastic member that affects the measurement from the inner body 200 and cutting it into a rectangle having a diaper longitudinal direction of 80 mm and a diaper width direction of 50 mm.
  • the inner side of the frame-shaped fusion part 41 is surrounded by the packaging sheet 58 that is the front-side member and the rear-side member in the front and back direction, and the periphery is surrounded by the frame-like fusion part 41, so
  • the non-fused particulate temperature change substance 42 can move only within the range of the frame-like fused portion 41. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change substance 40 is suppressed, and an expected temperature change occurs.
  • the fused portion 41 of the temperature change substance 40 has a frame shape, it becomes much more flexible than fusing the whole in a planar shape, and it is possible to suppress hardening due to fusion of the temperature change substance.
  • the number of the frame-like fused portions 41 may be only one, but it is preferable to provide a large number with a somewhat small size. In the latter case, a large number of quadrangular or circular frame-like fused portions can be provided, but it is preferable to provide a lattice-shaped fused portion 41 as shown in the figure.
  • a lattice pattern in addition to a pattern composed of a fusion line along the front-rear direction and a fusion line along the width direction, as shown in FIG. 22, a fusion line along an oblique direction intersecting with the front-rear direction and the width direction. It is also possible to use an oblique lattice pattern consisting of only the above. In the grid pattern, as shown in FIG.
  • the dimensions of the frame-like fused portion 41 can be appropriately determined, but the width 41w of the frame line is preferably about 1 to 5 mm, and the area inside the frame is preferably about 100 to 1000 mm 2 .
  • the length (center distance) 41d between intersecting positions is about 10 to 40 mm, and the intersecting angle ⁇ (inner side angle) is 60 to 120 degrees.
  • the 4L relationship is satisfied.
  • the position of the non-fused portion N is not limited to each intersection position, and the non-fused portion N may be located at a position other than each intersection position as long as the above relationship is satisfied.
  • the front side member and the back side member that sandwich the temperature change substance 40 it is preferable to use an existing member as shown in FIG. 20A, and an absorbent body 56 can be used in addition to the packaging sheet 58.
  • an absorbent body 56 can be used in addition to the packaging sheet 58.
  • a surface side member is made into a surface side absorber, and a back surface side member is a back surface It can also be used as a side absorber.
  • the fused portion 41 is formed only in the pressure heating region corresponding to the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340, and the other portion inside the frame is not pressurized and heated, and the temperature change Fusion of the substance 42 does not occur.
  • This first method is preferable because the frame-like fused portion 41 can be formed only by heat embossing of an appropriate pattern.
  • the difference between the fast-acting effect and the slow-acting effect can be made clearer. If the particle-like temperature change substance 40 has the same particle size, the lower the bulk density, the larger the surface area and the higher the contact efficiency with urine, and thus the temperature change speed becomes faster. This tendency is particularly remarkable when the temperature change substance 40 is dissolved in urine to cause a temperature change.
  • the material in the case of continuous production using a production line, it is preferable that the material is supplied in a continuous band shape and is cut into a predetermined dimension at predetermined intervals in the MD direction after the frame-shaped fusion part is fused.
  • the temperature change substance may spill from the cut end in the manufacturing process of the product, the transportation process to the sales destination, the usage process by the user, and the like. Therefore, as shown in FIG.
  • the heat emboss 41E forms a fused portion of a linear temperature change material along the CD direction as in the first method described above.
  • the surface side member 48 and the back side member 49 have a certain degree of extent. It may be simply bonded with strength.
  • Cutting in these methods is performed in advance prior to attachment to other members, and depending on the type of the front side member and the back side member, it can also be performed by cutting into individual products.
  • the molded piece 40T of the temperature change substance may be formed only from the temperature change substance 40 described above, but may be formed by mixing other substances as long as it is about 50% or less.
  • urine cooled or heated by the temperature change substance 40 is absorbed on the spot by the superabsorbent polymer and stops on the surface of the article. Can communicate.
  • hydrophilic fibers such as pulp and hydrophilic synthetic fibers may be mixed.
  • the compressive force increases, the bridge supported between the particles collapses, the voids are filled, and the particles themselves are deformed.
  • the part is destroyed and the newly formed fine particles fill the voids, and the particles are strongly adhered due to plastic deformation of the particles, and at the contact point of the particles, the surface melts due to the heat generated by sliding friction between the particles, and the particles are bonded. Even if the compressive force is removed, the shape does not collapse.
  • the compression-molded piece 40T of the temperature change material is formed using such a principle.
  • a binder can be used.
  • Sugar alcohols such as sorbitol and xylitol are suitable temperature-change substances in that the particles are easy to mold.
  • the degree of compression of the molded piece 40T can be appropriately determined according to the particle size, density, etc. of the raw material particles.
  • the raw material particles porous particles having a low bulk density such as granules, particles having a lot of surface irregularities, and particles having fine pores on the surface or inside are suitable.
  • the degree of bulk density of the raw material particles may be determined as appropriate, but it is preferably 50% or less of the true density (having 50% or more voids (space) with respect to the apparent volume).
  • the bulk density of the molded piece 40T is about 0.75 to 1.10 g / cm 3 , particularly It is preferable to perform compression molding so as to be about 0.80 to 1.00 g / cm 3 .
  • the size of the molded piece 40T can be determined as appropriate, but if it is too fine, it will move easily, and if it is too large, it will give a foreign object feeling. Therefore, a flat piece having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 is used. Preferably there is. Further, the weight of the particulate matter remaining in the compression molding process, or the formed piece 40T is divided or subdivided by bending or the like in the subsequent diaper manufacturing process, and the strip having an area of 50 mm 2 or less existing in the article The weight of is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 30% or less, based on the total amount of the temperature-changing substance used. (That is, the weight ratio of the molded piece 40T having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 with respect to the weight of the total temperature change material is preferably 50% or more, particularly preferably 70% or more. .)
  • both rolls 340 and 341 may be smooth rolls having no irregularities on their surfaces, or embossing rolls having irregularities of a predetermined pattern on either or both surfaces. You can also Even in the former case, since the entire particulate temperature change substance 40p is not compressed at a time, the whole does not become one large molded piece, but as shown in FIG. A large number of small pieces 40T are formed. In the latter case, a large number of small pieces 40T having a regular shape can be formed by the emboss pattern. Further, it is preferable that a small piece having an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 is 50% or more.
  • the front side member and the back side member are sheets, it is easy to perform the above-described compression molding process before assembling these sheets to other members.
  • the product can be manufactured.
  • positioning and compressing the particulate matter of a temperature change substance between sheets a particulate matter may move between sheets between arrangement
  • the mixing ratio of the fibrous material is suitably 50% or less, preferably about 10 to 30%. Since sugar alcohols such as sorbitol and xylitol are easy to form particles, they can be formed even by mixing materials that are difficult to be compression-molded.
  • the superabsorbent polymer particles can also be mixed.
  • Such a manufacturing method can be adopted only by changing the pressurizing condition by compression molding using pressure, and it is very easy to apply to existing facilities.
  • the present invention can be applied to a wide range of uses such as pants-type, tape-type, or pad-type absorbent articles.
  • the disposable diaper for training it can be used for the purpose of suppressing bacterial growth, odor suppression, cooling prevention, etc. by cooling the excrement.

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Epidemiology (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Vascular Medicine (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Absorbent Articles And Supports Therefor (AREA)
  • Orthopedics, Nursing, And Contraception (AREA)

Abstract

A disposable absorptive article having high temperature change efficiency and capable of more quickly achieving a greater temperature change. An absorbing body (56) has formed therein a pocket (57) penetrating in the front surface/rear surface direction through the absorbing body (56), extending from the center (CL) in the front-rear direction of an article to the front side of the article, and including that portion of the article which corresponds to 20% of the overall length (L5) of the article. A temperature changing substance (40) for cooling or heating urine by making contact with the urine is mounted in the pocket (57).

Description

使い捨て吸収性物品Disposable absorbent article
 本発明は、所謂トイレトレーニングに用いられる使い捨ておむつ、使い捨て吸収パッド等の、使い捨て吸収性物品に関するものである。 The present invention relates to disposable absorbent articles such as disposable diapers and disposable absorbent pads used for so-called toilet training.
 従来、トレーニング用の使い捨ておむつとしては、装着者に排尿を知覚させるために、尿を肌に接触させ、湿潤による不快感を強調する工夫を施したものが一般的であったが、肌のフヤケからカブレに繋がるおそれがあることから、尿を肌から遠ざけるものでありながら、装着者に排尿を知覚させるための技術開発が行われている。
 この代表的なものが、ソルビトール等のように尿との接触により尿に温度変化をもたらす物質の利用である(例えば特許文献1、2参照)。特許文献1記載の技術では、ソルビトール等の温度変化物質を含む部材を、吸収要素の身体側に配置することが提案されている。また、特許文献2記載の技術では、浸透性層と不浸透性層との間にソルビトール等の温度変化物質を挟んでなる要素を、吸収性コア上に配置することが提案されている。
特許3922722号公報 特許3830901号公報
Conventionally, disposable disposable diapers for training use have been designed to make the wearer perceive urination by bringing urine into contact with the skin and emphasizing discomfort due to moisture. Since there is a possibility that it may lead to fogging, technical development has been performed to make the wearer perceive urination while keeping urine away from the skin.
A typical example is the use of a substance that causes a temperature change in urine by contact with urine, such as sorbitol (see, for example, Patent Documents 1 and 2). In the technique described in Patent Document 1, it is proposed to arrange a member containing a temperature change substance such as sorbitol on the body side of the absorption element. In the technique described in Patent Document 2, it is proposed that an element having a temperature change substance such as sorbitol sandwiched between an permeable layer and an impermeable layer is disposed on the absorbent core.
Japanese Patent No. 3922722 Japanese Patent No. 3830901
 しかしながら、従来のものの温度変化は、温度変化物質の使用量の割には変化度合い及び変化速度ともに不十分であるという問題点があった。そのため、従来のものは装着者が排尿を知覚して申告する率が低く、例えば、現在市販されている冷却物質入りのトレーニング用の使い捨ておむつでは高くても4割程度であった。
 そこで、本発明の主たる課題は、温度変化効率に優れ、より速く且つより大きな温度変化を発揮しうる使い捨て吸収性物品を提供することにある。
However, the conventional temperature change has a problem that both the degree of change and the change speed are insufficient for the amount of the temperature change substance used. For this reason, the conventional one has a low rate at which the wearer perceives and reports urination, for example, about 40% at most of disposable diapers for training containing cooling substances currently on the market.
Then, the main subject of this invention is providing the disposable absorbent article which is excellent in temperature change efficiency, and can exhibit a larger temperature change faster.
 本発明者らは、上記問題点について鋭意研究した結果、次のような知見を得た。すなわち、単に吸収体中に温度変化物質を含有させるだけであると、温度変化物質に接触せずに吸収体に保持された尿が、温度変化を阻害するだけでなく、吸収体内で温度変化物質による温度変化作用が発現しても、その温度変化は、吸収体が本来的に有している断熱作用によって遮られてしまう。また、温度変化物質による温度変化作用を効率良く発現させようとすると、一見、排尿部位に温度変化物質を配置するのが望ましいようであるが、排尿部位は最も継続的に尿が供給される部位であり、先に供給された尿により発生する温度変化が、後に供給される尿の温度により弱まるか又は打ち消されてしまう。しかもこれらの現象は、温度変化性能に対する影響が極めて大きい。本発明は、かかる知見に基づいてなされたものである。 As a result of earnest research on the above problems, the present inventors have obtained the following knowledge. That is, if the temperature-changing substance is simply contained in the absorber, urine held in the absorber without contacting the temperature-changing substance not only inhibits the temperature change but also the temperature-changing substance in the absorber. Even if the temperature change action due to is expressed, the temperature change is blocked by the heat insulating action inherently possessed by the absorber. In addition, when it is attempted to efficiently express the temperature change action by the temperature change substance, it seems to be desirable to arrange the temperature change substance at the urination site, but the urination site is the site where urine is supplied most continuously. The temperature change generated by the urine supplied earlier is weakened or canceled by the temperature of the urine supplied later. Moreover, these phenomena have an extremely large influence on the temperature change performance. The present invention has been made based on such knowledge.
 <請求項1記載の発明>
 物品前後方向中央より前側に延在する前側部分と、物品前後方向中央より後側に延在する後側部分とを有し、
 液透過性表面シートと裏面側シートとの間に吸収体が介在されてなる吸収部分を備えた、使い捨て吸収性物品において、
 前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%延在しており、
 前記吸収体に、厚みがその周囲の領域の0~50%であるポケット部が、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の20%の部位を含み、且つ前記ポケット部の前端部と前記吸収体の前端部との距離が物品全長の5~30%であるように、形成されており、
 前記ポケット部内に、尿との接触により尿を冷却又は加熱する温度変化物質が配置されている、
 ことを特徴とする使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 1>
It has a front side portion that extends to the front side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and a rear side portion that extends to the rear side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article,
In a disposable absorbent article comprising an absorbent portion in which an absorber is interposed between a liquid-permeable top sheet and a back sheet,
The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side.
The absorbent body has a pocket portion having a thickness of 0 to 50% of the surrounding area including a portion of 20% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and the front end of the pocket portion and the absorbent body Formed so that the distance from the front end of the product is 5 to 30% of the total length of the article,
In the pocket portion, a temperature change substance that cools or heats urine by contact with urine is disposed,
A disposable absorbent article characterized by that.
 (作用効果)
 本発明では、排尿時に表面シートを透過し、吸収体に吸収された尿が拡散作用により前側に十分に移動した後に、ポケット部内の温度変化物質と接触する。これにより、ポケット部内では温度変化が発生し、その温度変化が吸収体を介さずに、装着者の腹側部分に伝達される。このように、十分に拡散移動した後の尿が温度変化に寄与する構造であると、従来のような、先に供給された尿により発生する温度変化が後に供給される尿の温度により弱まる又は打ち消されるといった現象を回避でき、温度変化物質の使用量に見合った温度変化が発現する。しかも、その十分な温度変化はポケット部(表裏貫通部)で発生するため、身体へ効率良く伝達される。よって、本発明によれば、温度変化効率に優れ、より速く且つより大きな温度変化を発揮しうる使い捨て吸収性物品となる。
(Function and effect)
In the present invention, urine that has passed through the surface sheet during urination and has been absorbed by the absorber has sufficiently moved to the front side by the diffusion action, and then comes into contact with the temperature change substance in the pocket portion. As a result, a temperature change occurs in the pocket portion, and the temperature change is transmitted to the wearer's ventral portion without going through the absorber. Thus, when the urine after sufficiently diffusing and moving has a structure that contributes to the temperature change, the temperature change generated by the previously supplied urine is weakened by the temperature of the urine supplied later, The phenomenon of canceling out can be avoided, and a temperature change corresponding to the amount of the temperature change substance used appears. Moreover, since the sufficient temperature change occurs in the pocket portion (front and back penetration portion), it is efficiently transmitted to the body. Therefore, according to this invention, it becomes a disposable absorbent article which is excellent in temperature change efficiency, and can exhibit a larger temperature change faster.
 <請求項2記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質は尿への溶解により吸熱反応を起し、尿を冷却するものであり、且つ温度20℃の100mlの水への溶解度が30g以上であり、
 前記ポケット部内における前記温度変化物質の目付けが500~1000g/m2であり、
 前記ポケット部の総面積は2500~8000mm2であり、
 前記温度変化物質により前記吸収体に生じうる熱量変化の総量は20cal以上であり、
 前記温度変化物質を有する部分の単位面積当たりの熱量変化は1cal/cm2以上である、
 請求項1記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 2>
The temperature-changing substance causes endothermic reaction when dissolved in urine, cools urine, and has a solubility in 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C. of 30 g or more,
The basis weight of the temperature change substance in the pocket is 500 to 1000 g / m 2 ;
The total area of the pocket portion is 2500 to 8000 mm 2 .
The total amount of heat change that can occur in the absorber due to the temperature change material is 20 cal or more,
The calorie change per unit area of the portion having the temperature change substance is 1 cal / cm 2 or more.
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 1.
 (作用効果)
 このような寸法のポケット部内に、このような性能及び量の温度変化物質を用いることによって、上記本発明の作用効果がより顕著なものとなる。特に、温度変化物質が尿への溶解によって温度変化する物質である場合、ポケット部に供給される尿がポケット部の温度変化物質のほとんど全てを溶解するだけの量であると、温度変化した尿はこれを保持するものがないため周囲に拡散してしまうという問題が顕著である。しかし、本発明の吸収性物品は、十分に拡散移動した後の尿が温度変化に寄与する構造であるため、ポケット部の温度変化物質はその一部が溶け残り、温度変化した尿を保持することができる。そして、温度変化物質内に保持された尿がその後もゆっくりと温度変化物質の溶解を進めるため、温度変化がより確実に装着者に伝わる。
(Function and effect)
By using such a performance and amount of the temperature changing substance in the pocket portion having such a size, the above-described effects of the present invention become more remarkable. In particular, when the temperature-changing substance is a substance that changes its temperature when dissolved in urine, if the amount of urine supplied to the pocket part is sufficient to dissolve almost all of the temperature-changing substance in the pocket part, the temperature-changed urine Since there is nothing to hold this, the problem of spreading to the surroundings is remarkable. However, since the absorbent article of the present invention has a structure in which urine after sufficiently diffusing and moving contributes to temperature change, part of the temperature change substance in the pocket portion remains undissolved and holds the urine whose temperature has changed. be able to. Then, since the urine held in the temperature change substance slowly advances the dissolution of the temperature change substance thereafter, the temperature change is more reliably transmitted to the wearer.
 <請求項3記載の発明>
 前記吸収体は、親水性繊維を120~200g/m2、及び高吸収性ポリマー粒子を170~220g/m2含み、前記親水性繊維の含有量よりも前記高吸収性ポリマーの含有量のほうが多い、請求項2記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 3>
The absorber includes 120 to 200 g / m 2 of hydrophilic fibers and 170 to 220 g / m 2 of superabsorbent polymer particles, and the content of the superabsorbent polymer is higher than the content of the hydrophilic fibers. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 2, wherein the disposable absorbent article is large.
 (作用効果)
 ポケット部自体は吸収量が少ないあるいは全くないため、供給される尿の量が多いと、温度変化した尿のうちポケット部に保持しきれない分については周囲に拡散してしまい、装着者への温度変化の伝達が不十分になることがある。しかし、親水性繊維の使用量が高吸収性ポリマーに対して少ないと、高吸収性ポリマーが水分を吸収してゼリー状に膨張した後の吸収体内の液拡散性は低くなるため、少なくとも排尿口に近い位置の吸収体におけるポケット部との境界近傍においては、ポケット部に供給されて温度変化した尿が吸収体内に戻って拡散することがない。
(Function and effect)
Since the pocket itself absorbs little or not at all, if the amount of urine supplied is large, the portion of the urine that has changed in temperature that cannot be held in the pocket will diffuse to the surroundings, Insufficient transmission of temperature changes. However, if the amount of the hydrophilic fiber used is small relative to the superabsorbent polymer, the liquid diffusibility in the absorbent body after the superabsorbent polymer absorbs moisture and expands into a jelly shape becomes low. In the vicinity of the boundary with the pocket portion in the absorber near the position, urine supplied to the pocket portion and changed in temperature does not return and diffuse into the absorber.
 <請求項4記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質として、粒子状の温度変化物質が前記ポケット部に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 4>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein a particulate temperature change substance is incorporated in the pocket portion as the temperature change substance.
 <請求項5記載の発明>
 前記ポケット部の周囲の、少なくとも前記ポケット部の前端部近傍には、高吸収性ポリマーが、前記吸収体のその他の領域と比較して最も高密度に配置されている、
 請求項4記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 5>
Around the pocket portion, at least in the vicinity of the front end portion of the pocket portion, the superabsorbent polymer is disposed at the highest density compared to the other regions of the absorber.
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 4.
 (作用効果)
 ポケット部の周囲、少なくとも装着者の腹部にあたるポケット部の前端部近傍に高吸収性ポリマーが高密度に配置されていると、拡散しようとする温度変化した尿を吸収保持し、装着者の腹部周辺にとどめることができるため、好ましい。
(Function and effect)
When the superabsorbent polymer is densely arranged around the pocket, at least near the front end of the pocket corresponding to the wearer's abdomen, it absorbs and maintains the temperature-changed urine to diffuse, and around the wearer's abdomen It is preferable because it can be limited to
 <請求項6記載の発明>
 水分との接触により色が変化する排泄インジケータの少なくとも一部が、前記ポケット部と重なるように設けられ、且つ前記温度変化物質は吸湿性を有する、請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 6>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein at least a part of the excretion indicator whose color is changed by contact with moisture is provided so as to overlap the pocket portion, and the temperature change substance has hygroscopicity.
 (作用効果)
 トレーニング用おむつでは排泄インジケータも併用して装着者に排尿のあったことを伝えるような仕様とすることが多いが、排泄インジケータが吸収体のポケット部と重なるように設けられていると、少量の尿でも変色が良好であるため好ましい。ここで、温度変化物質が吸湿性を有すると、保管中の空気中の水分(湿気)の接触、あるいは使用中の着用者の汗や体から放散される水分の接触によって、排泄していないのに排泄インジケータが変色してしまうことがない。
(Function and effect)
In most training diapers, an excretion indicator is also used to inform the wearer that urination has occurred, but if the excretion indicator is provided so as to overlap the pocket of the absorber, a small amount of Urine is preferable because discoloration is good even in urine. Here, if the temperature change substance has hygroscopicity, it is not excreted due to contact with moisture in the air during storage (humidity) or contact with moisture released from the wearer's sweat or body during use. The excretion indicator will not change color.
 <請求項7記載の発明>
 前記ポケット部は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の0~40%の範囲に収まるとともに、前後方向長さが物品全長の10~20%、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の25~60%である、請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 7>
The pocket portion fits in the range of 0 to 40% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side, the length in the longitudinal direction is 10 to 20% of the total length of the article, and the width is 25 to 60% of the total width of the absorber. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein
 (作用効果)
 このように構成されていると、十分な大きさのポケット部がほぼ装着者の腹部又は下腹部に位置するようになる。そして、装着者の腹部又は下腹部は身体表面において相対的に膨出しているため、ポケット部内における温度変化部位に近接し易くなる。よって、ポケット部内における温度変化が装着者に伝わり易くなる。
(Function and effect)
If comprised in this way, a pocket part of sufficient size will come to be located in a wearer's abdominal part or lower abdominal part. And since the wearer's abdomen or lower abdomen swells relatively on the surface of the body, it becomes easy to approach the temperature change part in the pocket part. Therefore, the temperature change in the pocket portion is easily transmitted to the wearer.
 <請求項8記載の発明>
 前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%、及び後側に物品全長の25~45%延在しており、
 前記ポケット部は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の25~45%、及び後側に物品全長の20~40%、物品の幅方向中央に沿って延在し、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の25~60%である、
 請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 8>
The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side and 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the rear side.
The pocket portion extends from the center in the front-rear direction of the article to 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the front side, 20 to 40% of the total length of the article on the rear side, and extends along the center in the width direction of the article. 25-60% of the total width,
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5.
 (作用効果)
 このように、温度変化物質を含むポケット部を排尿位置も含むように設けると、尿量が少ない場合でも、多い場合でも十分な温度変化を発生させることができるため、好ましい。
(Function and effect)
Thus, it is preferable to provide the pocket portion containing the temperature change substance so as to include the urination position, because a sufficient temperature change can be generated even when the amount of urine is small or large.
 <請求項9記載の発明>
 前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%、及び後側に物品全長の25~45%延在しており、
 前記ポケット部は、前記吸収体の中央領域を取り囲むように環状に形成されており、その線幅が物品全長の5~10%であり、前記中央領域は物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の15~35%、及び後側に物品全長の15~35%、物品の幅方向中央に沿って延在し、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の40~75%である、
 請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 9>
The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side and 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the rear side.
The pocket portion is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the central area of the absorbent body, and the line width thereof is 5 to 10% of the total length of the article. The central area extends from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side of the article. 15 to 35%, and 15 to 35% of the total length of the article on the rear side, extending along the center in the width direction of the article, and the width is 40 to 75% of the total width of the absorbent body.
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5.
 (作用効果)
 吸収体に吸収された尿は、排泄位置から周囲全体に略均等に拡散するため、温度変化物質を含むポケット部を、上記中央領域を取り囲むように環状に設けると、より多くの尿をポケット部内の温度変化物質と接触させることができる、あるいは尿の拡散方向が偏っても確実にポケット部内の温度変化物質と接触させることができるため、好ましい。
(Function and effect)
Since the urine absorbed in the absorber diffuses almost uniformly from the excretion position to the entire periphery, if a pocket portion containing a temperature change substance is provided in an annular shape so as to surround the central region, more urine is placed in the pocket portion. This is preferable because it can be brought into contact with the temperature change substance in the pocket portion even if the diffusion direction of urine is biased.
 <請求項10記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質は、少なくとも平面方向に自由に移動できる状態の粒子状分を有さず、あるいは少量しか有さず、大部分は移動しないように配置されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 10>
The disposable absorption according to claim 3, wherein the temperature-changing substance does not have a particulate portion in a state where it can freely move in at least a plane direction, or has only a small amount, and is arranged so as not to move most. Sex goods.
 (作用効果)
 従来の技術のように、温度変化物質が粉粒体状のまま非固定で含有されていると、製品の流通過程又は使用中に温度変化物質が所定部位から移動し、温度変化物質に対する尿の供給が不足する、温度変化が身体に対して十分に伝達しなくなる等により、温度変化が不十分となるおそれがある。これに対して、上述のように温度変化物質を吸収性物品の内部に固体状でかつ自由に移動できる状態の粒子状分を有さない、あるいは少量しか有さないように配置することにより、温度変化物質の大部分は移動しなくなる。よって、所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。
(Function and effect)
If the temperature change substance is contained in the form of powder and non-fixed as in the prior art, the temperature change substance moves from a predetermined site during the distribution process or use of the product, and the urine against the temperature change substance There is a risk that the temperature change becomes insufficient due to insufficient supply or temperature change not being sufficiently transmitted to the body. On the other hand, by arranging the temperature-changing substance so as not to have a particulate matter in a solid and freely movable state inside the absorbent article as described above, or to have only a small amount, Most of the temperature change material does not move. Therefore, an expected temperature change occurs.
 <請求項11記載の発明>
前記吸収体は全体が包装シートによって包まれているとともに、前記温度変化物質が前記吸収体及び前記包装シートの少なくとも一方に融着されている、請求項10記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 11>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 10, wherein the absorbent body is entirely wrapped with a packaging sheet, and the temperature change substance is fused to at least one of the absorbent body and the packaging sheet.
 (作用効果)
 温度変化物質は水分との接触により温度変化をもたらすものである。よって、水分との接触効率を高めるため、温度変化した水分を肌により近い部位に保持するため、及び温度変化物質がじかに肌に触れないようにするため、温度変化物質の融着部位を、表面シートと包装シートとの間に配置されたシート、又は包装シートとするのが好ましい。
(Function and effect)
A temperature change substance causes a temperature change by contact with moisture. Therefore, in order to increase the contact efficiency with moisture, to keep the moisture whose temperature has changed in a part closer to the skin, and to prevent the temperature changing substance from touching the skin directly, It is preferable to set it as the sheet | seat arrange | positioned between a sheet | seat and a packaging sheet, or a packaging sheet.
 <請求項12記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質が融着されるとともに、この融着された温度変化物質が砕かれている、請求項11記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 12>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 11, wherein the temperature change substance is fused and the fused temperature change substance is crushed.
 (作用効果)
 このように温度変化物質を吸収性物品の内部に融着することにより、温度変化物質が所定位置に確実に保持され、移動し難くなる。よって、所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。また、融着された温度変化物質が砕かれていることにより、温度変化物質の融着による硬質化が低減されるようになる。この形態は、一部の温度変化物質が粉砕され融着対象部材から脱落することも含まれる。なお、用語「融着」とは、温度変化物質が溶融状態で対象(吸収体)に付着した後に固化し、固化体が対象に固定された状態を意味する。
(Function and effect)
By fusing the temperature change substance in the absorbent article in this manner, the temperature change substance is reliably held at a predetermined position and is difficult to move. Therefore, an expected temperature change occurs. Further, since the fused temperature change substance is crushed, the hardening due to the fusion of the temperature change substance is reduced. This form includes that a part of the temperature change substance is pulverized and dropped from the member to be fused. The term “fused” means a state in which the temperature change substance is solidified after adhering to the target (absorber) in a molten state, and the solidified body is fixed to the target.
 <請求項13記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質は、その表面側及び裏面側にそれぞれ位置する表面側部材及び裏面側部材間に挟まれるとともに、その一部が前記表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着し、且つ残部が前記表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着しておらず、
 前記温度変化物質の融着部分が枠状をなすとともに、その枠状融着部分により囲まれる部分に前記非融着の温度変化物質が封じ込められている、
 請求項10記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 13>
The temperature change substance is sandwiched between a front surface side member and a back surface side member positioned on the front surface side and the back surface side, respectively, and a part thereof is fused to the front surface side member and the back surface side member, and the remaining portion is the It is not fused to the front side member and the back side member,
The fused portion of the temperature change material forms a frame shape, and the non-fused temperature change material is enclosed in a portion surrounded by the frame-like fused portion,
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 10.
 (作用効果)
 従来の技術では、温度変化物質が粉粒体状のまま非固定で含有されているため、製品の流通過程又は使用中に温度変化物質が所定部位から移動し、温度変化物質に対する水分の供給が不足する、温度変化が身体に対して十分に伝達しなくなる等により、温度変化が不十分となるおそれがある。この問題点は、前述のように、吸収性物品内部の適宜の部材に温度変化物質を融着することで解決することができるが、温度変化物質が融着した部分は硬くなり、吸収性物品の柔軟性を損ねるおそれがある。
 これに対して、上述のように、表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着する枠状融着部分の内側は、表裏方向は表面側部材及び裏面側部材により囲まれ、周囲は枠状融着部分により囲まれていると、その内側に配置された温度変化物質は融着してなくても、枠状融着部分の範囲内でしか移動できない。よって、温度変化物質の移動を抑制され、所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。しかも、温度変化物質の融着部分は枠状であるため、全体を面状に融着するよりも格段に柔軟となり、温度変化物質の融着による硬質化も抑制することができる。
 なお、用語「融着」とは、温度変化物質が溶融状態で対象に付着した後に固化し、固化体が対象に固定された状態を意味する。また、「枠状」とは、温度変化物質の融着部分が完全に連続するものの他、温度変化物質の移動が抑えられる範囲において部分的な不連続部分を有する形態も含むものである。
(Function and effect)
In the prior art, since the temperature change substance is contained in a powder form in a non-fixed state, the temperature change substance moves from a predetermined site during the distribution process or use of the product, and moisture is supplied to the temperature change substance. There is a risk that the temperature change becomes insufficient due to lack of temperature, or the temperature change is not sufficiently transmitted to the body. As described above, this problem can be solved by fusing the temperature change substance to an appropriate member inside the absorbent article. However, the portion where the temperature change substance is fused becomes hard, and the absorbent article. There is a risk of damaging the flexibility.
On the other hand, as described above, the inner side of the frame-like fusion part fused to the front-side member and the rear-side member is surrounded by the front-side member and the rear-side member in the front-back direction, and the periphery is frame-like fusion. If it is surrounded by the part, the temperature change substance arranged on the inside can move only within the range of the frame-like fusion part even if it is not fused. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change substance is suppressed, and the desired temperature change occurs. Moreover, since the fusion part of the temperature change material is frame-shaped, it becomes much more flexible than the whole surface fusion, and it is possible to suppress hardening due to fusion of the temperature change material.
The term “fusion” means a state in which the temperature-changing substance is solidified after adhering to the object in a molten state, and the solidified body is fixed to the object. Further, the “frame shape” includes a form in which the fusion part of the temperature change substance is completely continuous, and a form having a partial discontinuity in a range in which the movement of the temperature change substance is suppressed.
 <請求項14記載の発明>
 前記枠状融着部分が多数配列されて格子状パターンをなしており、且つこの格子状パターンは、前記温度変化物質の融着部及び非融着部が交互に列なる点線状の融着線からなり、各交差位置において少なくとも一方の融着線が不連続となっているパターンである、請求項13記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 14>
A plurality of the frame-like fusion parts are arranged to form a lattice-like pattern, and the lattice-like pattern is a dotted-line fusion line in which the fusion parts and non-fusion parts of the temperature change substance are alternately arranged. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 13, which has a pattern in which at least one fusion line is discontinuous at each intersection position.
 (作用効果)
 温度変化物質の融着部分をこのようなパターンで設けることにより、温度変化物質の融着部分が不連続となることにより、融着部分による硬質化がより一層軽減されるようになる。
(Function and effect)
By providing the fusion part of the temperature change material in such a pattern, the fusion part of the temperature change material becomes discontinuous, and thus the hardening by the fusion part is further reduced.
 <請求項15記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質として、相対的に融点が高い高融点温度変化物質と、相対的に融点が低い低融点温度変化物質とを含有しており、前記枠状融着部分が前記低融点温度変化物質の融着により形成され、且つ前記枠状融着部分により囲まれる部分に前記高融点温度変換物質が前記非融着の温度変化物質として封じ込められている、請求項13記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 15>
The temperature changing material contains a high melting point temperature changing material having a relatively high melting point and a low melting point temperature changing material having a relatively low melting point, and the frame-like fused portion is the low melting point temperature changing material. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 13, wherein the high melting point temperature converting substance is contained as a non-fused temperature change substance in a part formed by fusing and surrounded by the frame-like fused part.
 (作用効果)
 融点の異なる温度変化物質を用い、低融点温度変化物質により枠状融着部分を形成し、その内側に高融点温度変化物質を配置することで、製造に際して枠状融着部分の形成が容易となる。
(Function and effect)
By using temperature change materials with different melting points, forming a frame-like fusion portion with a low-melting temperature change material, and disposing a high-melting temperature change material inside it, it is easy to form a frame-like fusion portion during production Become.
 <請求項16記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質として、繊維状に形成された温度変化物質が前記ポケット部に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 16>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein a temperature-changing substance formed in a fiber shape is incorporated in the pocket portion as the temperature-changing substance.
 (作用効果)
 このように温度変化物質を繊維状として、ポケット部に内蔵させることにより、温度変化物質が所定位置に確実に保持され、移動しなくなる。よって、所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。また、温度変化物質は繊維状であり、その層は柔軟であるため、温度変化物質を有する部分であっても硬質化は殆ど起こらない。
(Function and effect)
Thus, by making the temperature change substance into a fibrous form and incorporating it in the pocket portion, the temperature change substance is reliably held at a predetermined position and does not move. Therefore, an expected temperature change occurs. Further, since the temperature change material is fibrous and the layer is flexible, even the portion having the temperature change material hardly undergoes hardening.
 <請求項17記載の発明>
 前記温度変化物質として、粒子状の温度変化物質を圧縮成形して得られる成形片が、前記ポケット部内に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 17>
The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein a molded piece obtained by compression molding a particulate temperature change substance as the temperature change substance is incorporated in the pocket portion.
 (作用効果)
 従来の技術では、粉粒体状の温度変化物質を用いる場合、温度変化物質が粉粒体状のまま非固定で含有されているため、製品の流通過程又は使用中に温度変化物質が所定部位から部材間の隙間や繊維間の隙間を介して移動し、温度変化物質に対する水分の供給が不足する、温度変化が身体に対して十分に伝達しなくなる等により、温度変化が不十分となるおそれがある。この問題点を解決する方法として、吸収性物品内部の適宜の部材に温度変化物質を溶融付着することが考えられたが、その場合、温度変化物質の表面積の低下により水分との接触効率が低下し、温度変化効率が低下するおそれがある。
 これに対して、上述のような粒子状の温度変化物質を圧縮成形して得られる成形片は、粒子状のままのものと比べて、部材間の隙間や繊維間の隙間を介して移動し難い。よって、このような温度変化物質の成形片を表面側部材及び裏面側部材間に挟んだ状態で内蔵することにより、温度変化物質の移動を抑制することができる。また、粒子の圧縮成形片は多孔質構造であるため、温度変化物質粒子の単なる溶融固化物と比べて表面積、すなわち水分との接触面積が格段に大きいため、温度変化効率が殆ど低下しないか又は低下するとしても少なくて済む。したがって、温度変化物質が移動し難いものでありながら温度変化物質の水分との接触面積が十分に確保され、もって所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。
(Function and effect)
In the prior art, when using a temperature-change substance in the form of a granular material, the temperature-change substance is contained in a non-fixed state in the form of a powder, so that the temperature-change substance is in a predetermined part during the distribution process or use of the product. The temperature change may be insufficient due to the lack of moisture supply to the temperature change substance or the temperature change not being sufficiently transmitted to the body. There is. As a method for solving this problem, it was considered that a temperature change substance was melted and adhered to an appropriate member inside the absorbent article. In this case, the contact efficiency with moisture was reduced due to a decrease in the surface area of the temperature change substance. In addition, the temperature change efficiency may be reduced.
On the other hand, the molded piece obtained by compression molding the particulate temperature-change substance as described above moves through the gap between the members and the gap between the fibers as compared with the particulate one. hard. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change material can be suppressed by incorporating the molded piece of such a temperature change material in a state of being sandwiched between the front surface side member and the back surface side member. In addition, since the compression-molded piece of particles has a porous structure, the surface area, that is, the contact area with moisture is much larger than that of a simple solidified product of temperature-change substance particles, so that the temperature change efficiency is hardly reduced or If it drops, it will be less. Therefore, although the temperature change substance is difficult to move, a sufficient contact area with the moisture of the temperature change substance is ensured, so that a desired temperature change occurs.
 <請求項18記載の発明>
 前記成形片は、平均粒径が200~600μm且つ嵩密度が0.50~0.70g/cm3の糖アルコール粒子を嵩密度が0.80~1.10g/cm3となるように圧縮成形して得られる多孔質片である、請求項17記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 18>
The molded piece is formed by compression molding sugar alcohol particles having an average particle size of 200 to 600 μm and a bulk density of 0.50 to 0.70 g / cm 3 so that the bulk density is 0.80 to 1.10 g / cm 3. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 17, which is a porous piece obtained as described above.
 (作用効果)
 温度変化物質として冷却物質を用いる場合、安全性、安定性(融点等)及び入手容易性の観点から糖アルコールが好適であり、その場合、圧縮成形前の粒子の平均粒径及び成形片の嵩密度が上述の範囲内であると特に好ましい。
(Function and effect)
When a cooling substance is used as the temperature change substance, sugar alcohol is preferable from the viewpoints of safety, stability (melting point, etc.), and availability. In this case, the average particle diameter of the particles before compression molding and the bulk of the molded piece It is particularly preferable that the density is within the above range.
 <請求項19記載の発明>
 前記成形片は厚みが0.5~2.0mm且つ面積が50~1000mm2で前記ポケット部内に複数あるいは多数存在する扁平片である、請求項18記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
<Invention of Claim 19>
19. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 18, wherein the molded piece is a flat piece having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 and a plurality or a plurality of pieces in the pocket portion.
 (作用効果)
 このように温度変化物質の目付けを多くする場合、従来のように粒子状のまま含有させると粒子が厚み方向に重なり合う場合に粒子の移動が起こりやすい。よって、温度変化物質を成形片とすることはこのような場合に好適である。また温度変化物質の目付けを多くする場合、成形片が厚すぎたり、面積が大き過ぎたりすると使用者に異物感をもたらすため、上述の厚み及び面積の範囲内のものを物品内に複数あるいは多数内蔵するのが好ましい。
(Function and effect)
When the basis weight of the temperature change substance is increased in this way, if the particles are contained as in the conventional manner, the particles tend to move when the particles overlap in the thickness direction. Therefore, it is suitable in such a case to use the temperature change substance as a molded piece. Further, when the basis weight of the temperature change substance is increased, if the molded piece is too thick or the area is too large, the user feels a foreign object. It is preferable to incorporate it.
 以上のとおり、本発明によれば、温度変化効率に優れ、より速く且つより大きな温度変化を発揮しうる使い捨て吸収性物品となる、等の利点がもたらされる。 As described above, according to the present invention, there are advantages such as a disposable absorbent article that is excellent in temperature change efficiency, faster and capable of exhibiting a larger temperature change.
 以下、本発明の一実施形態について、パンツ型使い捨ておむつ(トレーニングパンツ)の例を引いて説明するが、本発明はテープ式の使い捨ておむつやパッド型の吸収性物品等にも適用できることはいうまでもない。
 図1~図9は、パンツ型使い捨ておむつの一例を示している。各図において、「前後方向」とは腹側(前側)と背側(後側)を結ぶ方向を意味し、「幅方向」とは前後方向と直交する方向(左右方向)を意味し、「上下方向(縦方向)」とはおむつの装着状態、すなわちおむつの前身頃両側部と後身頃両側部を重ね合わせるようにおむつを股間部で2つに折った状態で胴回り方向と直交する方向、換言すればウエスト開口部WO側と股間部側とを結ぶ方向を意味する。
Hereinafter, although an example of a pants-type disposable diaper (training pants) is drawn and explained about one embodiment of the present invention, it goes without saying that the present invention can be applied to a tape-type disposable diaper, a pad-type absorbent article, and the like. Nor.
1 to 9 show an example of a pants-type disposable diaper. In each figure, “front-rear direction” means a direction connecting the ventral side (front side) and back side (rear side), “width direction” means a direction (left-right direction) orthogonal to the front-rear direction, `` Vertical direction (vertical direction) '' means the wearing state of the diaper, that is, the direction orthogonal to the waistline direction with the diaper folded in two at the crotch so that both sides of the front and back of the diaper are overlapped, In other words, it means the direction connecting the waist opening WO side and the crotch side.
 このパンツ型使い捨ておむつは、装着者の胴回りのうち腹側を覆う腹側外装シート12Fと背側を覆う背側外装シート12Bとを有しており、腹側外装シート12Fの幅方向両側縁と背側外装シート12Bの幅方向両側縁とが、上下方向全体にわたりヒートシールや超音波溶着等により溶着接合されて筒状の胴回り部100が形成されるように構成されている。符号12Aは個々の溶着部を示しており、この溶着部12Aの群がサイドシール部を構成するものである。図示形態のように、背側外装シート12Bが溶着部12Aよりも下側に延出している場合には、この部分までを含む上下方向範囲に一体的にヒートシール等の加工を施し、背側延出部14に延出溶着部12Eを設けることができる。延出溶着部12Eを設けることにより、後述する背側延出部14の第2の細長状弾性伸縮部材16の引き込みを防止することができる。この場合、脇部の破りやすさを考慮して、溶着部12Aは小さな溶着部の集合からなり、溶着部12Aにおける溶着面積の比率が低い接合パターンとすることが一般的であるが、延出溶着部12Eでは破りやすさを考慮する必要が無いため、溶着パターンは溶着部12Aよりも溶着面積の比率を高くすることにより第2の細長状弾性伸縮部材16が確実に溶着固定されるようにしてもよい。また、延出溶着部12Eは臀部カバー部14Cの縁部をカーブしたラインで溶着し、臀部カバー部14Cの第2の細長状弾性伸縮部材16の引き込みを防止することもできる。 This pants-type disposable diaper has an abdominal exterior sheet 12F that covers the abdominal side of the wearer's girth and a back exterior sheet 12B that covers the back side, and both side edges in the width direction of the abdominal exterior sheet 12F. The both side edges in the width direction of the back side exterior sheet 12B are welded and joined by heat sealing, ultrasonic welding, or the like over the entire vertical direction, so that the cylindrical waistline portion 100 is formed. Reference numeral 12A denotes an individual welded portion, and a group of the welded portions 12A constitutes a side seal portion. When the backside exterior sheet 12B extends below the welded portion 12A as shown in the figure, the backside sheet is subjected to processing such as heat sealing integrally in the vertical range including this portion, The extension weld part 12E can be provided in the extension part 14. FIG. By providing the extended welded portion 12E, it is possible to prevent the second elongated elastic elastic member 16 from being pulled in the backside extended portion 14 described later. In this case, in consideration of the ease of tearing of the side portions, the welded portion 12A is generally composed of a group of small welded portions, and a bonding pattern with a low ratio of the welded area in the welded portion 12A is generally used. Since it is not necessary to consider the ease of tearing in the welded portion 12E, the second elongated elastic elastic member 16 is surely welded and fixed by making the ratio of the welded area higher than the welded portion 12A. May be. Further, the extended welded portion 12E can be welded by a curved line at the edge of the collar cover portion 14C, and the second elongated elastic elastic member 16 of the collar cover portion 14C can be prevented from being pulled.
 また、胴回り部100における腹側外装シート12Fの幅方向中央部内面に内装体200の前端部がホットメルト接着剤等により連結されるとともに、背側外装シート12Bの幅方向中央部内面に内装体200の後端部がホットメルト接着剤等により連結されており、腹側外装シート12Fと背側外装シート12Bとが股間側で連続しておらず、離間されている。この離間距離Yは150~250mm程度とすることができる。図示しないが、腹側外装シート12Fと背側外装シート12Bとが股間部で連続した形態、つまり腹側から背側までを一体的な外装シートにより連続的に覆う形態を採用することもできる。 In addition, the front end portion of the interior body 200 is connected to the inner surface of the belly side exterior sheet 12F in the width direction center portion of the waistline portion 100 by a hot melt adhesive or the like, and the interior body is disposed on the inner surface of the back side exterior sheet 12B in the width direction center portion. The rear end portions of 200 are connected by a hot melt adhesive or the like, and the abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B are not continuous on the crotch side and are separated from each other. This separation distance Y can be about 150 to 250 mm. Although not shown, a form in which the abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B are continuous in the crotch part, that is, a form in which the abdomen side to the back side are continuously covered with an integral exterior sheet may be employed.
 図7及び図8からも判るように、胴回り部100の上部開口は、装着者の胴を通すウエスト開口部WOとなり、内装体200の幅方向両側において胴回り部100の下縁および内装体200の側縁によりそれぞれ囲まれる部分が脚を通す脚開口部LOとなる。各溶着部12Aを剥がして展開した状態では、図1に示すように砂時計形状をなす。内装体200は、背側から股間部を通り腹側までを覆うように延在するものであり、排泄物を受け止めて液分を吸収し保持する部分であり、胴回り部100は内装体200を装着者に対して支持する部分である。 As can be seen from FIGS. 7 and 8, the upper opening of the waistline portion 100 becomes a waist opening WO through which the wearer's torso passes, and the lower edge of the waistline portion 100 and the interior body 200 on both sides in the width direction of the interior body 200. The portions surrounded by the side edges are leg openings LO through which the legs pass. In the state where each welded portion 12A is peeled off and developed, an hourglass shape is formed as shown in FIG. The interior body 200 extends from the back side through the crotch part to cover the abdomen side, and is a part that receives the excrement and absorbs and retains the liquid. This is the part that supports the wearer.
 (外装シート)
 腹側外装シート12F及び背側外装シート12Bは、図4及び図5にも示すようにシート状資材12,12を2枚貼り合せてなるものであり、内側に位置する内側シート状資材12はウエスト開口部WOの縁までしか延在していないが、外側に位置する外側シート状資材12は内側シート状資材12のウエスト側の縁を回り込んでその内側に折り返されており、この折り返し部分12rは内装体200のウエスト側端部上までを被覆するように延在され、対向面にホットメルト接着剤等により固定されている。シート状資材12としては溶着により接合できるものであれば特に限定されないが、不織布であるのが好ましい。不織布は、その原料繊維が何であるかは特に限定されない。例えば、ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系、ポリエステル系、ポリアミド系等の合成繊維、レーヨンやキュプラ等の再生繊維、綿等の天然繊維などや、これらから二種以上が使用された混合繊維、複合繊維などを例示することができる。さらに、不織布は、どのような加工によって製造されたものであってもよい。加工方法としては、公知の方法、例えば、スパンレース法、スパンボンド法、サーマルボンド法、メルトブローン法、ニードルパンチ法、エアスルー法、ポイントボンド法等を例示することができる。不織布を用いる場合、その坪量は10~30g/m2程度とするのが好ましい。
(Exterior sheet)
The abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B are formed by laminating two sheet- like materials 12 and 12 as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5. Although it extends only to the edge of the waist opening WO, the outer sheet-like material 12 positioned on the outside wraps around the edge on the waist side of the inner sheet-like material 12 and is folded back to the inside. 12r is extended so that it may cover to the waist side edge part of the interior body 200, and it is being fixed to the opposing surface with the hot-melt-adhesive agent. The sheet-like material 12 is not particularly limited as long as it can be joined by welding, but is preferably a nonwoven fabric. The nonwoven fabric is not particularly limited as to what the raw fiber is. For example, synthetic fibers such as olefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyesters and polyamides, recycled fibers such as rayon and cupra, natural fibers such as cotton, and mixed fibers and composite fibers using two or more of them. Etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, the nonwoven fabric may be manufactured by any processing. Examples of the processing method include known methods such as a spun lace method, a spun bond method, a thermal bond method, a melt blown method, a needle punch method, an air through method, and a point bond method. When using a nonwoven fabric, the basis weight is preferably about 10 to 30 g / m 2 .
 そして、腹側外装シート12F及び背側外装シート12Bには、胴回りに対するフィット性を高めるために、両シート状資材12,12間に糸ゴム等の細長状弾性伸縮部材15~19が所定の伸張率で設けられている。細長状弾性伸縮部材15~18,19T,19Uとしては、合成ゴムを用いても、天然ゴムを用いても良い。各外装シート12F,12Bの両シート状資材12,12の貼り合せや、その間に挟まれる細長状弾性伸縮部材15~19の固定にはホットメルト接着またはヒートシールや超音波接着を用いることができる。外装シート12F,12B全面を強固に固定するとシートの風合いを損ねるため好ましくない。これらを組合せ、細長状弾性伸縮部材15~19の接着は強固にし、それ以外の部分は接着しないか弱く接着するのが好ましい。 In the abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B, elongated elastic elastic members 15 to 19 such as thread rubber are stretched between the sheet materials 12 and 12 in order to enhance fit to the waistline. Is provided at a rate. As the elongated elastic elastic members 15 to 18, 19T, and 19U, synthetic rubber or natural rubber may be used. Hot melt bonding, heat sealing, or ultrasonic bonding can be used for bonding the sheet materials 12 and 12 of the respective exterior sheets 12F and 12B and fixing the elongated elastic members 15 to 19 sandwiched therebetween. . If the entire surface of the exterior sheets 12F and 12B is firmly fixed, the texture of the sheet is impaired, which is not preferable. By combining these, it is preferable that the elongated elastic elastic members 15 to 19 are firmly bonded, and the other portions are not bonded or are bonded weakly.
 より詳細には、背側外装シート12Bは、溶着部12A群によるサイドシール部と同じ上下方向範囲を占める背側本体部13と、この背側本体部13の下側に延出する背側延出部14とを有している。背側延出部14は、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部14Mと、その両側に延出した臀部カバー部14Cとを有している。 More specifically, the back-side exterior sheet 12B includes a back-side body portion 13 that occupies the same vertical range as the side seal portions by the welded portion 12A group, and a back-side extension that extends below the back-side body portion 13. And an exit portion 14. The back extension part 14 has a width direction center part 14 </ b> M overlapping with the interior body 200, and a buttock cover part 14 </ b> C extending on both sides thereof.
 背側延出部14の形状は適宜定めることができるが、図示例では、背側延出部14の上端部は、背側本体部13と同幅で背側本体部13の下側に延出されており、その下側は股間側に近づくにつれて幅が狭められている。背側本体部13と同幅の部分は省略することもできる。このように構成されていると、臀部カバー部14Cの幅方向外側の縁14eが、股間側に近づくにつれて内装体200側に近づくような直線状または曲線状をなすようになり、臀部を覆い易い形状となる。 The shape of the dorsal extension 14 can be determined as appropriate, but in the illustrated example, the upper end of the dorsal extension 14 has the same width as the dorsal body 13 and extends below the dorsal body 13. The width is narrowed as the lower side approaches the crotch side. A portion having the same width as that of the back-side main body 13 can be omitted. If comprised in this way, the edge 14e of the width direction outer side of the buttock cover part 14C will come in the shape of a straight line or a curve which approaches the interior body 200 side as it approaches the crotch side, and it is easy to cover a buttock part. It becomes a shape.
 背側延出部14の寸法は適宜定めることができるが、図6に示すように、臀部カバー部14Cの幅方向長さ14x(臀部カバー部14Cの幅方向外側の縁14eと内装体200の側縁との幅方向の最大離間距離)が80~160mmであり、臀部カバー部14Cの上下方向の長さ14y(延出長さ)が30~80mmであると、より好ましい。また、背側延出部14の幅方向に最も広い部位と上下方向に最も広い部位により定まる四角形の面積をSとすると、背側延出部14の面積はSに対して20~80%、特に40~60%程度であると、臀部の外観および装着感に優れるため、好ましい。 Although the dimension of the back side extension part 14 can be determined suitably, as shown in FIG. 6, the width direction length 14x of the collar part cover part 14C (the edge 14e on the width direction outer side of the collar part cover part 14C and the inner body 200) More preferably, the maximum distance in the width direction with respect to the side edge is 80 to 160 mm, and the length 14y (extension length) in the vertical direction of the collar cover portion 14C is 30 to 80 mm. Further, assuming that the area of a quadrangle determined by the widest portion in the width direction and the widest portion in the vertical direction is S, the area of the back extension portion 14 is 20 to 80% of S, In particular, it is preferably about 40 to 60% because the outer appearance and wearing feeling of the buttocks are excellent.
 背側本体部13は、上下方向において概念的に上端部(ウエスト部)Wと、これよりも下側の下側部分Uとに分けることができ、その範囲は製品のサイズによって異なるが、一般に、上端部Wの上下方向長さは15~80mm、下側部分Uの上下方向長さは35~220mmとすることができる。 The back body 13 can be conceptually divided into an upper end (waist part) W and a lower part U below the upper part in the vertical direction, and the range varies depending on the size of the product. The vertical length of the upper end W can be 15 to 80 mm, and the vertical length of the lower portion U can be 35 to 220 mm.
 背側本体部13の上端部(ウエスト部)Wにおける内側シート状資材12の内側面と外側シート状資材の折り返し部分12rの外側面との間には、幅方向全体にわたり連続するように、複数の背側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材17が上下方向に間隔を空けて、かつ所定の伸張率で幅方向に沿って伸張された状態で固定されている。また、背側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材17のうち、背側本体部13の下側部分Uに隣接する領域に配設される1本または複数本については、内装体200と重なっていてもよいし、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部を除いてその幅方向両側にそれぞれ設けてもよい。この背側ウエスト弾性伸縮部材17としては、太さ155~1880dtex、特に470~1240dtex程度(合成ゴムの場合。天然ゴムの場合には断面積0.05~1.5mm2、特に0.1~1.0mm2程度)の糸ゴムを、4~12mmの間隔で3~22本程度、それぞれ伸張率150~400%、特に220~320%程度で固定するのが好ましい。また、背側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材17は、その全てが同じ太さと伸張率にする必要はなく、例えば背側ウエスト部の上部と下部で弾性伸縮部材の太さと伸張率が異なるようにしてもよい。 Between the inner side surface of the inner sheet-like material 12 and the outer side surface of the folded-back portion 12r of the outer sheet-like material at the upper end (waist portion) W of the back-side main body portion 13, a plurality of pieces are continuously provided in the entire width direction. The back waist elastic elastic members 17 are fixed in a state where they are stretched along the width direction at a predetermined stretch rate with an interval in the vertical direction. In addition, one or more of the back-side waist elastic elastic members 17 disposed in the region adjacent to the lower portion U of the back-side main body 13 may overlap the interior body 200. Alternatively, it may be provided on both sides in the width direction except for the central portion in the width direction that overlaps the interior body 200. The back waist elastic elastic member 17 has a thickness of 155 to 1880 dtex, especially about 470 to 1240 dtex (in the case of synthetic rubber. In the case of natural rubber, the cross-sectional area is 0.05 to 1.5 mm 2 , especially 0.1 to the rubber thread of 1.0mm about 2), 4 3 to 22 present approximately at intervals of ~ 12 mm, an extension ratio 150 to 400%, preferably fixed in particular about 220 to 320%. Further, it is not necessary for all of the back side waist elastic elastic members 17 to have the same thickness and extension rate. For example, the elastic waist members may have different thicknesses and extension rates at the upper and lower portions of the back waist part. Good.
 また、背側本体部13の下側部分Uにおける内側シート状資材12の外側面と外側シート状資材12の内側面との間には、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部を除いて、その上側および幅方向両側の各部位に、幅方向全体にわたり連続するように、複数の第1の細長状弾性伸縮部材15が上下方向に間隔を空けて、かつ所定の伸張率で幅方向に沿って伸張された状態で固定されている。 Further, between the outer side surface of the inner sheet-like material 12 and the inner side surface of the outer sheet-like material 12 in the lower portion U of the back-side main body portion 13, except for the center portion in the width direction overlapping the interior body 200, A plurality of first elongate elastic elastic members 15 are vertically spaced along the width direction at a predetermined stretch rate so as to be continuous over the entire width direction at each of the upper and both sides in the width direction. It is fixed in the stretched state.
 第1の細長状弾性伸縮部材15としては、太さ155~1880dtex、特に470~1240dtex程度(合成ゴムの場合。天然ゴムの場合には断面積0.05~1.5mm2、特に0.1~1.0mm2程度)の糸ゴムを、1~15mm、特に3~8mmの間隔で5~30本程度、それぞれ伸張率200~350%、特に240~300%程度で固定するのが好ましい。 The first elongated elastic member 15 has a thickness of 155 to 1880 dtex, especially about 470 to 1240 dtex (in the case of synthetic rubber. In the case of natural rubber, the cross-sectional area is 0.05 to 1.5 mm 2 , particularly 0.1. It is preferable to fix thread rubber of about 1 to 15 mm 2 ) at 1 to 15 mm, particularly 3 to 8 mm at an interval of about 5 to 30 and an elongation of about 200 to 350%, particularly about 240 to 300%.
 また、背側延出部14における内側シート状資材12の外側面と外側シート状資材12の内側面との間には、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部を除いて、その幅方向両側の各部位に、幅方向全体にわたり(少なくとも臀部カバー部14C全体にわたり)連続するように、複数の第2の細長状弾性伸縮部材16が上下方向に間隔を空けて、かつ所定の伸張率で幅方向に沿って伸張された状態で固定されている。 In addition, between the outer side surface of the inner sheet-like material 12 and the inner side surface of the outer sheet-like material 12 in the back side extending portion 14, except for the center portion in the width direction that overlaps the interior body 200, The plurality of second elongated elastic elastic members 16 are spaced apart in the vertical direction so as to be continuous with each part over the entire width direction (at least over the entire buttock cover portion 14C), and at a predetermined expansion rate in the width direction. It is fixed in a stretched state.
 第2の細長状弾性伸縮部材16としては、太さ155~1880dtex、特に470~1240dtex程度(合成ゴムの場合。天然ゴムの場合には断面積0.05~1.5mm2、特に0.1~1.0mm2程度)の糸ゴムを、5~40mm、特に5~20mmの間隔で2~10本程度、それぞれ伸張率150~300%、特に180~260%で固定するのが好ましい。 The second elongated elastic elastic member 16 has a thickness of 155 to 1880 dtex, particularly about 470 to 1240 dtex (in the case of synthetic rubber. In the case of natural rubber, the cross-sectional area is 0.05 to 1.5 mm 2 , particularly 0.1. It is preferable to fix the thread rubber of about 1.0 to 1.0 mm 2 at 5 to 40 mm, particularly about 2 to 10 at intervals of 5 to 20 mm, respectively, with an elongation of 150 to 300%, particularly 180 to 260%.
 一方、腹側外装シート12Fは背側外装シート12Bの背側本体部13と基本的に同様の腹側本体部(溶着部12A群によるサイドシール部と同じ上下方向範囲を占める部分)のみからなるものであり、胴回り方向に沿って延在する矩形状をなし、背側外装シート12Bのような背側延出部14を有していないものである。 On the other hand, the abdominal exterior sheet 12F is composed of only the abdominal body part basically the same as the back body part 13 of the back exterior sheet 12B (the part occupying the same vertical range as the side seal part by the welded part 12A group). It is a rectangular shape extending along the waistline direction, and does not have the back-side extending portion 14 like the back-side exterior sheet 12B.
 すなわち、腹側外装シート(腹側本体部)12Fの上端部(ウエスト部)Wおよび下側部分Uのうち、上端部Wにおける内側シート状資材12の内側面と外側シート状資材12の折り返し部分12rの外側面との間には、幅方向全体にわたり連続するように、複数の腹側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材18が上下方向に間隔を空けて、かつ所定の伸張率で幅方向に沿って伸張された状態で固定されている。この腹側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材18は、背側ウエスト部弾性伸縮部材17に対して、本数、太さ、伸張率、間隔、及び上下方向配置をできるだけ近づけるのが好ましいが、異ならしめることもでき、異ならしめる場合、本数の差は10本以下、好ましくは5本以下、太さの差は1880dtex以下、好ましくは470dtex以下、伸張率の差は100%以下、好ましくは40%以下、間隔の差は10mm以下、好ましくは5mm以下である。 That is, among the upper end portion (waist portion) W and the lower portion U of the abdominal exterior sheet (abdominal body portion) 12F, the inner side surface of the inner sheet material 12 and the folded portion of the outer sheet material 12 at the upper end portion W. A plurality of ventral waist elastic elastic members 18 are spaced in the vertical direction so as to be continuous over the entire width direction between the outer surface of 12r and extend along the width direction at a predetermined expansion rate. It is fixed in the state. The ventral waist elastic elastic member 18 is preferably as close as possible to the back waist elastic elastic member 17 in terms of number, thickness, stretch rate, spacing, and vertical arrangement, but may be different. When differentiating, the difference in number is 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, the difference in thickness is 1880 dtex or less, preferably 470 dtex or less, the difference in elongation is 100% or less, preferably 40% or less, the difference in spacing Is 10 mm or less, preferably 5 mm or less.
 また、腹側外装シート12F(腹側本体部)の下側部分Uにおける内側シート状資材12の外側面と外側シート状資材12の内側面との間には、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部を除いて、その上側および幅方向両側の各部位に、幅方向全体にわたり連続するように、複数の第3の細長状弾性伸縮部材19が上下方向に間隔を空けて、かつ所定の伸張率で幅方向に沿って伸張された状態で固定されている。第3の細長状弾性伸縮部材19の上下方向配設範囲は、下側部分の一部としても良いが、実質的に全体(全体に伸縮力が作用する範囲)とするのが好ましい。 Further, a center in the width direction that overlaps the interior body 200 between the outer surface of the inner sheet-like material 12 and the inner side surface of the outer sheet-like material 12 in the lower portion U of the ventral-side exterior sheet 12F (abdominal-side main body). A plurality of third elongate elastic elastic members 19 are vertically spaced apart from each other on the upper side and both sides in the width direction except for the portion, and have a predetermined stretch rate. It is fixed in a stretched state along the width direction. Although the vertical disposition range of the third elongated elastic elastic member 19 may be a part of the lower portion, it is preferable that the third elongated elastic elastic member 19 is substantially the whole (a range in which the expansion / contraction force acts on the whole).
 第3の細長状弾性伸縮部材19としては、第1の細長状弾性伸縮部材15と、本数、太さ、伸張率、間隔、及び上下方向配置をできるだけ近づけるのが好ましいが、異ならしめることもでき、異ならしめる場合、本数の差は10本以下、好ましくは5本以下、太さの差は1880dtex以下、好ましくは470dtex以下、伸張率の差は100%以下、好ましくは40%以下、間隔の差は10mm以下、好ましくは5mm以下である。 The third elongated elastic elastic member 19 is preferably as close as possible to the first elongated elastic elastic member 15 in terms of number, thickness, stretch rate, spacing, and vertical arrangement, but may be different. When differentiating, the difference in number is 10 or less, preferably 5 or less, the difference in thickness is 1880 dtex or less, preferably 470 dtex or less, the difference in elongation is 100% or less, preferably 40% or less, the difference in spacing Is 10 mm or less, preferably 5 mm or less.
 図示形態の腹側外装シート12Fは、溶着部12Aと同じ上下方向範囲を占める部分のみからなるものとしたが、背側と同様に、溶着部12Aと同じ上下方向範囲を占める腹側本体部と、この腹側本体部の下側に延出する腹側延出部とからなる構成とすることもできる。これにより、腹側外装シート12Fの脚周り形状を鼠蹊部に沿ってフィットする形状とすることができる。この場合、腹側延出部の面積は、背側延出部の面積の10~80%であるのが好ましく、20~50%であるとより好ましい。腹側延出部が過度に大きいと、かえってフィット性を損なうため好ましくない。 The abdominal side exterior sheet 12F in the illustrated form is composed of only a portion that occupies the same vertical range as the welded portion 12A, but, similarly to the back side, a ventral body portion that occupies the same vertical range as the welded portion 12A and In addition, a configuration including an abdominal-side extension portion extending below the abdominal-side main body portion may be employed. Thereby, the leg periphery shape of the abdominal exterior sheet | seat 12F can be made into the shape fitted along a buttock. In this case, the area of the abdominal extension is preferably 10 to 80%, more preferably 20 to 50% of the area of the dorsal extension. If the ventral extension is excessively large, the fit is rather impaired, which is not preferable.
 他方、図示のように、第1、第2及び第3の細長状弾性伸縮部材15、16及び19が、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部を除いてその幅方向両側にそれぞれ設けられていると、内装体200と外装シート12F,12Bが剥れにくいため好ましいが、この形態には、幅方向両側にのみ弾性伸縮部材が存在する形態の他、内装体200を横切ってその幅方向一方側から他方側まで弾性伸縮部材が存在しているが、内装体200と重なる幅方向中央部では弾性伸縮部材が切断され、伸縮力が作用しない(実質的には、弾性伸縮部材を設けないことに等しい)ように構成されている形態も含まれる。また、背側本体部13および背側延出部14の幅方向全体にわたり伸縮力が作用するように、第1、第2及び第3の細長状弾性伸縮部材15、16及び19の一部または全部を、内装体200を横切ってその幅方向一方側から他方側まで設けることもできる。 On the other hand, as shown in the figure, the first, second and third elongated elastic elastic members 15, 16 and 19 are provided on both sides in the width direction except for the width direction central portion overlapping the interior body 200. However, it is preferable because the inner body 200 and the outer sheets 12F and 12B are difficult to peel off. In this form, in addition to the form in which elastic elastic members are present only on both sides in the width direction, one side in the width direction across the inner body 200 There is an elastic stretch member from one side to the other side, but the elastic stretch member is cut at the central portion in the width direction overlapping with the interior body 200, and the stretch force does not act (substantially no elastic stretch member is provided) (Equal) is also included. Also, a part of the first, second and third elongated elastic elastic members 15, 16 and 19, or the elastic force acts over the entire width direction of the back side main body part 13 and the back side extension part 14. The whole can be provided across the interior body 200 from one side in the width direction to the other side.
 (内装体)
 内装体200は任意の形状を採ることができるが、図示の形態では長方形である。内装体200は、図3に示されるように、身体側となる表面シート30と、液不透過性シート11と、これらの間に介在された吸収要素50とを備えている。液不透過性シート11の裏面側には、内装体200の裏面全体を覆うように、あるいは腹側外装シート12Fと背側外装シート12Bとの間に露出する部分全体を覆うように、股間部外装シート12Mを固定することもできる。また、表面シート30と吸収要素50との間に、表面シート30を透過した液を速やかに吸収要素50へ移行させる中間シート(セカンドシート)を設けることもできるが、肌への熱伝達が阻害されるため、表面シート30と吸収要素50との間には、少なくとも後述するポケット部57と重なる部分、好ましくは全体にわたり、他の部材を設けないのが好ましい。さらに、内装体200の両脇に排泄物が漏れるのを防止するために、内装体200の両側に、身体側に起立するバリヤーカフス60,61を設けることができる。なお、図示しないが、内装体200の各構成部材は、ホットメルト接着剤などのベタ、ビードまたはスパイラル塗布などにより、適宜相互に固定することができる。また、内装体200は、メカニカルファスナーや粘着材を用い、外装シート12F,12Bに対して着脱自在に取り付けることもできる。
(Interior body)
The interior body 200 can take any shape, but is rectangular in the illustrated form. As shown in FIG. 3, the inner body 200 includes a surface sheet 30 on the body side, a liquid-impermeable sheet 11, and an absorbent element 50 interposed therebetween. On the back side of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11, a crotch portion is provided so as to cover the entire back surface of the interior body 200 or to cover the entire portion exposed between the abdominal exterior sheet 12F and the back exterior sheet 12B. The exterior sheet 12M can also be fixed. In addition, an intermediate sheet (second sheet) that quickly transfers the liquid that has permeated the surface sheet 30 to the absorbent element 50 can be provided between the surface sheet 30 and the absorbent element 50, but heat transfer to the skin is inhibited. Therefore, it is preferable that no other member is provided between the top sheet 30 and the absorbent element 50 at least in a portion overlapping with a pocket portion 57 described later, preferably over the entire portion. Furthermore, in order to prevent excrement from leaking on both sides of the interior body 200, barrier cuffs 60 and 61 standing on the body side can be provided on both sides of the interior body 200. Although not shown, the constituent members of the interior body 200 can be appropriately fixed to each other by solid, bead or spiral application such as hot melt adhesive. The interior body 200 can also be detachably attached to the exterior sheets 12F and 12B using a mechanical fastener or an adhesive material.
 (表面シート)
 表面シート30は、液を透過する性質を有するものであり、例えば、有孔又は無孔の不織布や、多孔性プラスチックシートなどを例示することができる。また、このうち不織布は、その原料繊維が何であるかは、特に限定されない。例えば、ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系、ポリエステル系、ポリアミド系等の合成繊維、レーヨンやキュプラ等の再生繊維、綿等の天然繊維などや、これらから二種以上が使用された混合繊維、複合繊維などを例示することができる。さらに、不織布は、どのような加工によって製造されたものであってもよい。加工方法としては、公知の方法、例えば、スパンレース法、スパンボンド法、SMS法、サーマルボンド法、メルトブローン法、ニードルパンチ法、エアスルー法、ポイントボンド法等を例示することができる。特には、表面側からの温度変化を感知し易くするため、スパンボンド法やSMS法により加工された不織布が薄さと強度のバランスに優れる点で好適であり、エアスルー法により加工された不織布は低坪量でも吸収が速やかでかつさらっと感に優れるため好適である。
(Surface sheet)
The top sheet 30 has a property of transmitting liquid, and examples thereof include a porous or non-porous nonwoven fabric, a porous plastic sheet, and the like. Of these, the nonwoven fabric is not particularly limited as to what the raw fiber is. For example, synthetic fibers such as olefins such as polyethylene and polypropylene, polyesters and polyamides, recycled fibers such as rayon and cupra, natural fibers such as cotton, and mixed fibers and composite fibers using two or more of them. Etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, the nonwoven fabric may be manufactured by any processing. Examples of the processing method include known methods such as a spunlace method, a spunbond method, an SMS method, a thermal bond method, a melt blown method, a needle punch method, an air through method, and a point bond method. In particular, a nonwoven fabric processed by the spunbond method or the SMS method is suitable in terms of excellent balance between thinness and strength in order to make it easy to detect temperature changes from the surface side, and a nonwoven fabric processed by the air-through method is low. Even the basis weight is suitable because it absorbs quickly and has a smooth feeling.
 また、表面シート30は、1枚のシートからなるものであっても、2枚以上のシートを貼り合せて得た積層シートからなるものであってもよい。同様に、表面シート30は、平面方向に関して、1枚のシートからなるものであっても、2枚以上のシートを貼り合わせてなるものであってもよい。 The top sheet 30 may be composed of a single sheet or a laminated sheet obtained by bonding two or more sheets. Similarly, the top sheet 30 may be composed of a single sheet or a laminate of two or more sheets in the planar direction.
 表面シート30を不織布から構成する場合、その厚みが0.1~3mm程度、特に0.5mm以下、且つ目付けが10~40g/m2程度、特に25g/m2以下であるように構成すると、裏面側から肌への伝熱性に優れるため好ましい。 When the top sheet 30 is composed of a nonwoven fabric, the thickness is about 0.1 to 3 mm, particularly 0.5 mm or less, and the basis weight is about 10 to 40 g / m 2 , especially 25 g / m 2 or less. It is preferable because it has excellent heat conductivity from the back side to the skin.
 バリヤーカフス60,61を設ける場合、表面シート30の両側部は、液不透過性シート11とバリヤーカフス60,61との間を通して、吸収要素50の裏側まで回りこませ、液の浸透を防止するために、液不透過性シート11及びバリヤーカフス60,61に対してホットメルト接着剤等により接着するのが好ましい。これにより、内装体200の両側部の剛性が向上するという効果も得られる。 When the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are provided, both side portions of the surface sheet 30 pass between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 to the back side of the absorbent element 50 to prevent liquid penetration. Therefore, it is preferable to adhere to the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 with a hot melt adhesive or the like. Thereby, the effect that the rigidity of the both sides of the interior body 200 is improved is also obtained.
(セカンドシート)
 前述のとおり、表面シート30を透過した液を速やかに吸収体へ移行させるために、表面シート30より液の透過速度が速い、セカンドシート44(図20(c)参照)を設けることができる。このセカンドシート44は、液を速やかに吸収体へ移行させて吸収体による吸収性能を高めるばかりでなく、吸収した液の吸収体からの「逆戻り」現象を防止し、表面シート30上を常に乾燥した状態とすることができる。セカンドシート44は省略することもできる。
(Second seat)
As described above, the second sheet 44 (see FIG. 20C) having a higher liquid permeation rate than the top sheet 30 can be provided in order to quickly transfer the liquid that has passed through the top sheet 30 to the absorber. This second sheet 44 not only quickly transfers the liquid to the absorbent body and enhances the absorption performance by the absorbent body, but also prevents the “reversed” phenomenon of the absorbed liquid from the absorbent body, and the top sheet 30 is always dried. It can be made into the state which carried out. The second sheet 44 can be omitted.
 セカンドシート44としては、表面シート30と同様の素材や、スパンレース、スパンボンド、SMS、パルプ不織布、パルプとレーヨンとの混合シート、ポイントボンド又はクレープ紙を例示できる。特にエアスルー不織布が嵩高であるため好ましい。エアスルー不織布には芯鞘構造の複合繊維を用いるのが好ましく、この場合芯に用いる樹脂はポリプロピレン(PP)でも良いが剛性の高いポリエステル(PET)が好ましい。目付けは20~80g/m2が好ましく、25~60g/m2がより好ましい。不織布の原料繊維の太さは2.2~10dtexであるのが好ましい。不織布を嵩高にするために、原料繊維の全部又は一部の混合繊維として、芯が中央にない偏芯の繊維や中空の繊維、偏芯且つ中空の繊維を用いるのも好ましい。 Examples of the second sheet 44 include the same material as the top sheet 30, spunlace, spunbond, SMS, pulp nonwoven fabric, a mixed sheet of pulp and rayon, point bond, or crepe paper. In particular, an air-through nonwoven fabric is preferable because it is bulky. It is preferable to use a core-sheath composite fiber for the air-through nonwoven fabric. In this case, the resin used for the core may be polypropylene (PP), but polyester (PET) having high rigidity is preferable. Basis weight is preferably 20 ~ 80g / m 2, more preferably 25 ~ 60g / m 2. The thickness of the raw fiber of the nonwoven fabric is preferably 2.2 to 10 dtex. In order to make the nonwoven fabric bulky, it is also preferable to use an eccentric fiber, a hollow fiber, or an eccentric and hollow fiber that does not have a core at the center as the mixed fiber of all or part of the raw fiber.
 セカンドシート44は、吸収体56の幅より短く中央に配置する他、全幅にわたって設けてもよい。セカンドシート44の長手方向長さは、吸収体56の長さと同一でもよいし、液を受け入れる領域を中心にした短い長さ範囲内であってもよい。 The second sheet 44 may be provided over the entire width in addition to being arranged in the center shorter than the width of the absorber 56. The length of the second sheet 44 in the longitudinal direction may be the same as the length of the absorbent body 56 or may be within a short length range centered on the region that receives the liquid.
 (液不透過性シート)
 液不透過性シート11の素材は、特に限定されるものではないが、例えば、ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系樹脂や、ポリエチレンシート等に不織布を積層したラミネート不織布、防水フィルムを介在させて実質的に不透液性を確保した不織布(この場合は、防水フィルムと不織布とで液不透過性シートが構成される。)などを例示することができる。もちろん、このほかにも、近年、ムレ防止の観点から好まれて使用されている不透液性かつ透湿性を有する素材も例示することができる。この不透液性かつ透湿性を有する素材のシートとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等のオレフィン系樹脂中に無機充填剤を混練して、シートを成形した後、一軸又は二軸方向に延伸して得られた微多孔性シートを例示することができる。さらに、マイクロデニール繊維を用いた不織布、熱や圧力をかけることで繊維の空隙を小さくすることによる防漏性強化、高吸水性樹脂または疎水性樹脂や撥水剤の塗工といった方法により、防水フィルムを用いずに液不透過性としたシートも、液不透過性シート11として用いることができる。
(Liquid impervious sheet)
The material of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is not particularly limited. For example, the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is substantially made of an olefin-based resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, a laminated nonwoven fabric obtained by laminating a nonwoven fabric on a polyethylene sheet, or a waterproof film. Non-woven fabrics that ensure liquid impermeability (in this case, a liquid-impermeable sheet is composed of a waterproof film and a non-woven fabric). Of course, in addition to this, materials having liquid impermeability and moisture permeability, which have been used and used in recent years from the viewpoint of preventing stuffiness, can also be exemplified. As the sheet of the material having liquid impermeability and moisture permeability, for example, an inorganic filler is kneaded in an olefin resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, and the sheet is formed, and then stretched in a uniaxial or biaxial direction. Examples of the microporous sheet obtained in this way can be given. In addition, non-woven fabric using micro-denier fiber, strengthening leak-proofing by reducing the voids of the fiber by applying heat or pressure, and applying water-absorbing resin or hydrophobic resin or water repellent. A sheet that is liquid-impermeable without using a film can also be used as the liquid-impermeable sheet 11.
 液不透過性シート11は、防漏性を高めるために、吸収要素50の両側を回りこませて吸収要素50の表面シート30側面の両側部まで延在させるのが好ましい。これにより、内装体200の両側部の剛性が向上するという効果も得られる。この延在部の幅は、左右それぞれ5~20mm程度が適当である。 The liquid-impermeable sheet 11 is preferably extended to both sides of the side surface 30 of the absorbent element 50 by wrapping around both sides of the absorbent element 50 in order to improve leakage prevention. Thereby, the effect that the rigidity of the both sides of the interior body 200 is improved is also obtained. The width of this extended portion is suitably about 5 to 20 mm on the left and right.
 また、液不透過性シート11の内面または外面には、印刷や着色によるデザインを施しても良い。さらに液不透過性シート11の外側に、股間部外装シート12Mとは別部材の、印刷または着色を施したデザインシートを貼り付けても良い。また、液不透過性シート11の内側に、水分との接触により色が変化する排泄インジケータ80を設けることができる。排泄インジケータ80は、液不透過性シート11と吸収体56の間に設けるのが好ましく、吸収体56の全長の30%以上、特に60%以上にわたって設けられるのが好ましく、少なくとも吸収体56の幅方向中央に沿って設けられるのが好ましい。吸収体56が後述する包装シート58によって包まれている場合、排泄インジケータ80は包装シート58の吸収体56側あるいは液不透過性シート11側のいずれの側に設けてもよい。また、排泄インジケータ80を設けた別の部材を液不透過性シート11と吸収体56の間に配置してもよい。排泄インジケータ80は、後述する吸収体56のポケット部57と重なるように設けられていると、少量の体液でも変色が良好であるため、好ましい。この場合、排泄インジケータ80の30%以上、特に50%以上がポケット部57と重なるのが好ましく、ポケット部57は吸収体56を上下方向に貫通するように設けられる(包装シート58は存在してもよい)のが好ましい。 Further, the inner surface or the outer surface of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 may be designed by printing or coloring. Further, a printed or colored design sheet, which is a separate member from the crotch outer sheet 12M, may be attached to the outside of the liquid-impermeable sheet 11. Further, an excretion indicator 80 whose color changes by contact with moisture can be provided inside the liquid-impermeable sheet 11. The excretion indicator 80 is preferably provided between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the absorber 56, and is preferably provided over 30% or more, particularly 60% or more of the entire length of the absorber 56, and at least the width of the absorber 56. It is preferable to be provided along the center of the direction. When the absorbent body 56 is wrapped by a packaging sheet 58 described later, the excretion indicator 80 may be provided on either the absorbent body 56 side or the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 side of the packaging sheet 58. Further, another member provided with the excretion indicator 80 may be disposed between the liquid-impermeable sheet 11 and the absorber 56. It is preferable that the excretion indicator 80 is provided so as to overlap with a pocket portion 57 of the absorber 56 described later, because discoloration is good even with a small amount of body fluid. In this case, 30% or more, particularly 50% or more of the excretion indicator 80 is preferably overlapped with the pocket portion 57, and the pocket portion 57 is provided so as to penetrate the absorbent body 56 in the vertical direction (the packaging sheet 58 exists). May also be preferred.
 (バリヤーカフス)
 バリヤーカフス60,61は、内装体200の両側部に沿って前後方向全体にわたり延在する帯状部材であり、表面シート30上を伝わって横方向に移動する尿や軟便を遮断し、横漏れを防止するために設けられているものである。
(Barrier cuffs)
The barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are belt-like members extending along the both sides of the interior body 200 over the entire front-rear direction, blocking urine and soft stool that travel along the top sheet 30 in the lateral direction and prevent side leakage. It is provided to prevent this.
 本実施の形態では、図3及び図4にも示すように、内装体200の左右各側において二重にバリヤーカフス60,61が設けられている。おむつを展開した状態では、図示のように、内側バリヤーカフス61は内装体200の側部から幅方向中央側に斜めに起立するものであり、外側バリヤーカフス60は、内側バリヤーカフス61の幅方向外側において内装体200の側部から起立するように設けられ、付け根側の部分は幅方向中央側に向かって斜めに起立し、中間部より先端側の部分は幅方向外側に向かって斜めに起立するものである。 In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are provided double on the left and right sides of the interior body 200. In the state where the diaper is unfolded, as shown in the figure, the inner barrier cuff 61 stands obliquely from the side of the interior body 200 toward the center in the width direction, and the outer barrier cuff 60 is in the width direction of the inner barrier cuff 61. The outer side portion is provided so as to stand upright from the side of the interior body 200, the base side portion stands obliquely toward the center in the width direction, and the tip side portion from the intermediate portion stands obliquely outward in the width direction. To do.
 より詳細には、内側バリヤーカフス61は、内装体200の前後方向長さに等しい長さを有する帯状のバリヤーシート62を幅方向に折り返して二つに折り重ねるとともに、折り返し部分及びその近傍のシート間に、細長状弾性伸縮部材63を長手方向に沿って伸張状態で、幅方向に間隔をあけて複数本固定してなるものである。細長状弾性伸縮部材63は、バリヤーシート62に対し、前後端部では固定されておらず、中間部においてバリヤーカフスが前後に伸縮するように固定されている。バリヤーシート62としてはスパンボンド不織布(SS、SSS等)やSMS不織布(SMS、SSMMS等)、メルトブロー不織布等の柔軟で均一性・隠蔽性に優れた不織布に、必要に応じてシリコンなどにより撥水処理を施したものを好適に用いることができ、繊維目付けは10~30g/m2程度とするのが好ましい。細長状弾性伸縮部材63としては糸ゴム等を用いることができる。スパンデックス糸ゴムを用いる場合は、太さは420~1120dtexが好ましく、620~940dtexがより好ましい。固定時の伸長率は、150~350%が好ましく、200~300%がより好ましい。また、図示しないが、二つに折り重ねたバリヤーシートの間に防水フィルムを介在させることもできる。 More specifically, the inner barrier cuff 61 folds the belt-like barrier sheet 62 having a length equal to the length in the front-rear direction of the interior body 200 in the width direction and folds it into two. Between them, a plurality of elongated elastic elastic members 63 are fixed along the longitudinal direction at intervals in the width direction. The elongated elastic elastic member 63 is not fixed to the barrier sheet 62 at the front and rear ends, and is fixed so that the barrier cuff extends and contracts in the middle part. The barrier sheet 62 is made of a spunbonded nonwoven fabric (SS, SSS, etc.), SMS nonwoven fabric (SMS, SSMMS, etc.), a melt-blown nonwoven fabric having excellent uniformity and concealment, and water repellent with silicon as necessary. A treated product can be suitably used, and the fiber basis weight is preferably about 10 to 30 g / m 2 . As the elongated elastic elastic member 63, rubber thread or the like can be used. When spandex thread rubber is used, the thickness is preferably 420 to 1120 dtex, and more preferably 620 to 940 dtex. The elongation at the time of fixation is preferably 150 to 350%, more preferably 200 to 300%. Although not shown, a waterproof film can be interposed between the barrier sheets folded in two.
 細長状弾性伸縮部材63は、内側バリヤーカフス61の先端部に1~2本配置するのが好ましく、先端部と基端部との間の中間部にも1~2本配置すると更に好ましい。中間部に細長状弾性伸縮部材63があると、これを支点として中間部から先端部に亘る範囲で肌に対して面で当たりやすくなる。中間部の細長状弾性伸縮部材63の配置位置は内側バリヤーカフス61の高さ(突出部の幅方向長さ)の30~70%範囲が好ましい。乳幼児用紙おむつでは、内側バリヤーカフス61の高さは15~35mm程度が好ましいため、細長状弾性伸縮部材63の配置範囲は先端から基端側に5~25mmの位置が好ましく、12~18mmの位置がより好ましい。内側バリヤーカフス61の先端部及び/または中間部にそれぞれ細長状弾性伸縮部材63を平行に設ける場合は、その配置間隔61dは2~10mmが好ましく、2~6mmがより好ましい。 It is preferable to arrange one or two elongated elastic elastic members 63 at the distal end portion of the inner barrier cuff 61, and more preferably one or two at the intermediate portion between the distal end portion and the proximal end portion. When the elongated elastic elastic member 63 is present in the intermediate portion, it becomes easy to hit the skin against the surface in the range from the intermediate portion to the distal end portion using this as a fulcrum. The arrangement position of the elongated elastic elastic member 63 in the middle is preferably in the range of 30 to 70% of the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (length in the width direction of the protruding portion). In the infant paper diaper, the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 is preferably about 15 to 35 mm. Therefore, the arrangement range of the elongated elastic stretch member 63 is preferably 5 to 25 mm from the distal end to the proximal end, and is 12 to 18 mm. Is more preferable. When the elongated elastic elastic members 63 are provided in parallel at the front end portion and / or the intermediate portion of the inner barrier cuff 61, the arrangement interval 61d is preferably 2 to 10 mm, and more preferably 2 to 6 mm.
 そして、内側バリヤーカフス61のうち幅方向において折り返し部分と反対側の端部は内装体200の側縁部の裏面に固定された取付部分(内側取付部分)65とされ、この取付部分65以外の部分は取付部分65から突出する突出部分66(折り返し部分側の部分であり、内側突出部分に相当する)とされ、この突出部分66のうち前後方向両端部が表面シート30表面にホットメルト接着剤やヒートシールによる前後固定部67により固定され、前後方向中間部が非固定の自由部分(内側自由部分)とされ、この自由部分に前後方向に沿う細長状弾性部材63が伸張状態で固定されている。 The end of the inner barrier cuff 61 opposite to the folded portion in the width direction is an attachment portion (inner attachment portion) 65 fixed to the back surface of the side edge of the interior body 200. The portion is a protruding portion 66 (a portion on the folded portion side and corresponding to the inner protruding portion) protruding from the mounting portion 65, and both ends in the front-rear direction of the protruding portion 66 are hot melt adhesive on the surface of the surface sheet 30. And a front-rear fixing portion 67 by heat sealing, and a middle portion in the front-rear direction is an unfixed free portion (inner free portion), and an elongated elastic member 63 along the front-rear direction is fixed to the free portion in an extended state. Yes.
 外側バリヤーカフス60も、内側バリヤーカフス61と基本的に同様の構造を有するものであるが、その取付部分(外側取付部分)68が、内装体200の裏面側における内側バリヤーカフス61の取付部分65よりも幅方向中央側において内側バリヤーカフス61の外面に固定される点、突出部分(外側突出部分)69のうち前後方向両端部が、取付部分68から内装体200の側部を通り内側バリヤーカフス61における内側突出部分66の前後方向両端部の表面まで延在し且つ内側突出部分66の前後方向両端部の表面に固定された付け根側部分と、この付け根側部分の先端から幅方向外側に折り返され且つ付け根側部分に固定された先端側部分とからなる点、細長状弾性伸縮部材63の配置及び本数等で異なるものである。 The outer barrier cuff 60 also has basically the same structure as the inner barrier cuff 61, but its attachment portion (outer attachment portion) 68 is an attachment portion 65 of the inner barrier cuff 61 on the back side of the interior body 200. Further, both ends in the front-rear direction of the projecting portion (outer projecting portion) 69 pass from the mounting portion 68 to the side of the interior body 200, and are fixed to the outer surface of the inner barrier cuff 61 on the center side in the width direction. 61, a base side portion that extends to the surfaces of both end portions in the front-rear direction of the inner projecting portion 66 and is fixed to the surfaces of both end portions in the front-rear direction of the inner projecting portion 66, and is folded back outward in the width direction from the tip of the base side portion. In addition, the point differs from the front end side portion fixed to the base side portion, the arrangement and number of the elongated elastic elastic members 63, and the like.
 ただし、内側バリヤーカフス61についても、内側突出部分の先端部は幅方向外側に折り返される構造、具体的には内側バリヤーカフス61の高さ(突出部の幅方向長さ)の1/2以下、好ましくは1/3以下であれば、外側バリヤーカフス61と同様に先端側部分が幅方向外側に折り返され且つ付け根部側部分に固定される構造を採っても良い。 However, the inner barrier cuff 61 also has a structure in which the tip of the inner protruding portion is folded outward in the width direction, specifically, not more than 1/2 of the height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (width direction length of the protruding portion), If it is preferably 1/3 or less, a structure in which the tip side portion is folded back in the width direction and fixed to the base portion side portion similarly to the outer barrier cuff 61 may be adopted.
 外側バリヤーカフス60の自由部分(外側自由部分)に設けられる細長状弾性伸縮部材63の本数は2~6本が好ましく、3~5本がより好ましい。配置間隔60dは3~10mmが適当である。このように構成すると、細長状弾性伸縮部材63を配置した範囲で肌に対して面で当たりやすくなる。先端側だけでなく付け根側にも細長状弾性伸縮部材63を配置しても良い。外側バリヤーカフス60に配置する細長状弾性伸縮部材63の太さや伸長率は、内側バリヤーカフス61に準ずるが、太さは内側バリヤーカフス61のものと同じ、またはより太く、伸長率は内側バリヤーカフス61のものと同じ、またはより低いほうが好ましい。 The number of the elongated elastic elastic members 63 provided in the free part (outer free part) of the outer barrier cuff 60 is preferably 2-6, and more preferably 3-5. The arrangement interval 60d is suitably 3 to 10 mm. If comprised in this way, in the range which has arrange | positioned the elongate elastic expansion-contraction member 63, it will become easy to contact | abut with respect to skin. The elongated elastic elastic member 63 may be disposed not only at the distal end side but also at the base side. The elongated elastic elastic member 63 disposed on the outer barrier cuff 60 has the same thickness and elongation rate as the inner barrier cuff 61, but the thickness is the same as or larger than that of the inner barrier cuff 61, and the elongation rate is the inner barrier cuff 61. The same or lower than that of 61 is preferred.
 また、突出部分66,69の前後固定部67の前後方向長さL6は、内側バリヤーカフス61の方が外側バリヤーカフス60と同じかまたは短く形成するのが好ましく、バリヤーカフス60,61における細長状弾性伸縮部材63の前後方向固定長さは、内側バリヤーカフス61の方が外側バリヤーカフス60と同じかまたは長く形成するのが好ましい。取付部分65と突出部分66との境界は、外側バリヤーカフス60と内側バリヤーカフス61とで同じ位置であっても良いが、外側バリヤーカフス60の境界が内側バリヤーカフス61の境界よりも幅方向中央側に離間しているのが好ましく、その離間距離は10mm以内が好ましい。 Further, the front-rear direction length L6 of the front-rear fixing portion 67 of the protruding portions 66, 69 is preferably formed so that the inner barrier cuff 61 is the same as or shorter than the outer barrier cuff 60, and is elongated in the barrier cuffs 60, 61. The length of the elastic stretch member 63 in the front-rear direction is preferably formed so that the inner barrier cuff 61 is the same as or longer than the outer barrier cuff 60. The boundary between the attachment portion 65 and the protruding portion 66 may be the same position on the outer barrier cuff 60 and the inner barrier cuff 61, but the boundary of the outer barrier cuff 60 is the center in the width direction than the boundary of the inner barrier cuff 61. It is preferable to be spaced apart to the side, and the distance is preferably within 10 mm.
 外側バリヤーカフス60及び内側バリヤーカフス61の取付部分68,65における突出部分66,69側の縁部には、ホットメルト接着剤やヒートシールによる線状の付け根固定部を形成するのが好ましい。また、他の固定部はホットメルト接着剤等を用いて適宜のパターンで固定することができる。この線状の付け根固定部は、内装体200の表面側の側部近傍(具体的には側縁から幅方向に0~5mm、好ましくは0~3mmの位置)または裏面側に位置するのが好ましい。この場合、バリヤーカフスを表面側に折り返して固定しているのは実質的に前後方向両端部のみとなるため、前後固定部67による幅方向中央側への規制が十分に作用しない股間部においては、外側バリヤーカフス60及び内側バリヤーカフス61いずれもが幅方向外側に向かって起立し、内側バリヤーカフス61の形成するポケットが広くなる。表面側で側縁から幅方向に5mmを越えて線状の付け根固定部が位置すると、股間部においてもバリヤーカフスが幅方向中央側に向かって起立し、内側バリヤーカフス61の形成するポケットが狭くなるため、好ましくない。裏面側に位置する場合は、内装体200の側縁から0~20mmの位置が適当だが、20mmを越えて位置してもよい。 It is preferable to form a linear root fixing part by hot melt adhesive or heat sealing at the edge part of the protruding parts 66 and 69 side of the attaching parts 68 and 65 of the outer barrier cuff 60 and the inner barrier cuff 61. The other fixing parts can be fixed in an appropriate pattern using a hot melt adhesive or the like. The linear root fixing portion is located in the vicinity of the side portion on the front surface side of the interior body 200 (specifically, the position from 0 to 5 mm in the width direction from the side edge, preferably 0 to 3 mm) or the back surface side. preferable. In this case, since the barrier cuff is folded and fixed to the surface side substantially only at both ends in the front-rear direction, in the crotch part where the restriction to the center in the width direction by the front-rear fixing part 67 does not sufficiently act. The outer barrier cuff 60 and the inner barrier cuff 61 both stand up outward in the width direction, and the pocket formed by the inner barrier cuff 61 becomes wider. When the linear root fixing part is positioned over 5 mm in the width direction from the side edge on the surface side, the barrier cuff rises toward the center in the width direction also in the crotch part, and the pocket formed by the inner barrier cuff 61 is narrow Therefore, it is not preferable. In the case of being located on the back side, a position of 0 to 20 mm from the side edge of the interior body 200 is appropriate, but it may be located beyond 20 mm.
 外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61の取付部分68,65の固定対象は、内装体200における表面シート30、液不透過性シート11、吸収要素50等適宜の部材とすることができ、またいずれか一方のバリヤーカフスを介して他方のバリヤーカフスを内装体200に対して固定することもできる。 The fixing target of the attachment portions 68 and 65 of the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 can be an appropriate member such as the surface sheet 30, the liquid-impermeable sheet 11, and the absorbent element 50 in the interior body 200. The other barrier cuff can be fixed to the interior body 200 via the one barrier cuff.
 かくして構成された外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61では、細長状弾性伸縮部材63の収縮力が前後方向両端部を近づけるように作用するが、突出部分66,69のうち前後方向両端部が起立しないように固定されるのに対して、それらの間は非固定の自由部分とされているため、自由部分のみが図3に示すように身体側に当接するように起立する。特に、取付部分68,65が内装体200の裏面側に位置していると、股間部及びその近傍において外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61が幅方向外側に開くように起立するため、外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61が脚周りに面で当接するようになり、フィット性が向上するようになる。一方、股間部の前後両側(腹部及び背部)においては、前後固定部67により外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61が幅方向外側へ開かないように規制されるため、内側バリヤーカフス61は高く起立し、外側バリヤーカフス60の下半分も同様に起立するため、腹部及び背部における内装体200両脇からのもれが確実に防止できる。また、内側バリヤーカフス61の突出部分66における前後固定部67は折り返さずに、外側バリヤーカフス60の突出部部分68における前後固定部67は外向きに折り返されているため、外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61における内側及び外側自由部分間の離間状態が維持され、外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61が広い間隔で確実に起立し、それぞれが脚周りにフィットするようになるため、漏れ防止性に優れたものとなる。 In the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 configured in this way, the contraction force of the elongated elastic elastic member 63 acts so as to bring the both ends in the front-rear direction closer, but the both ends in the front-rear direction among the protruding parts 66 and 69 do not stand up. However, only the free part stands up against the body side as shown in FIG. 3. In particular, when the attachment portions 68 and 65 are located on the back side of the interior body 200, the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 stand up so as to open outward in the width direction at the crotch portion and the vicinity thereof. The barrier cuffs 60, 61 come into contact with the legs around the surface, and the fit is improved. On the other hand, on both the front and rear sides (abdomen and back) of the crotch part, the inner and rear barrier cuffs 61 are restricted by the front and rear fixing part 67 so that the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 do not open outward in the width direction. In addition, since the lower half of the outer barrier cuff 60 is also erected in the same manner, it is possible to surely prevent the abdomen and the back from leaking from both sides of the interior body 200. Further, the front and rear fixing portions 67 of the protruding portion 66 of the inner barrier cuff 61 are not folded back, and the front and rear fixing portions 67 of the protruding portion 68 of the outer barrier cuff 60 are folded outward. , 61 is maintained between the inner and outer free parts, and the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60, 61 are securely raised at a wide interval, and each fits around the leg, providing excellent leakage prevention. It will be.
 バリヤーカフス60,61の寸法は適宜定めることができるが、乳幼児用紙おむつの場合は、例えば図7に示すように、内側バリヤーカフス61の起立高さ(展開状態における突出部分66の幅方向長さ)W5は10~50mm、特に15~35mmであるのが好ましく、外側バリヤーカフス60の起立高さ(展開状態における突出部分69の幅方向長さ)W6は15~60mm、特に20~40mmであるのが好ましい。また、内側バリヤーカフス61を表面シート30表面に倒した状態における先端間の離間距離W4は60~170mm、特に70~120mmであるのが好ましい。また、外側バリヤーカフス60を表面シート30表面と平行になるように、平坦に折り畳んだ状態において最も内側に位置する折り目間の離間距離W3は60~190mm、特に70~140mmであるのが好ましい。
 なお、図示形態と異なり、外側及び内側バリヤーカフス60,61のいずれか一方のみを設けることもできる。
Although the dimensions of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 can be determined as appropriate, in the case of an infant paper diaper, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the standing height of the inner barrier cuff 61 (the length in the width direction of the protruding portion 66 in the unfolded state). ) W5 is preferably 10 to 50 mm, particularly preferably 15 to 35 mm, and the standing height of the outer barrier cuff 60 (length in the width direction of the protruding portion 69 in the unfolded state) W6 is 15 to 60 mm, particularly 20 to 40 mm. Is preferred. Further, the separation distance W4 between the tips in a state where the inner barrier cuff 61 is tilted to the surface of the top sheet 30 is preferably 60 to 170 mm, particularly 70 to 120 mm. In addition, when the outer barrier cuff 60 is folded flat so as to be parallel to the surface of the top sheet 30, the distance W3 between the innermost folds is preferably 60 to 190 mm, particularly 70 to 140 mm.
Unlike the illustrated embodiment, only one of the outer and inner barrier cuffs 60 and 61 can be provided.
 (吸収要素)
 本例の吸収要素50は、吸収体56と、この吸収体56の全体を包む包装シート58とを有するものとなっているが、包装シート58は省略することもできる。
(Absorption element)
Although the absorption element 50 of this example has the absorber 56 and the packaging sheet 58 which wraps this absorber 56 whole, the packaging sheet 58 can also be abbreviate | omitted.
 (吸収体)
 吸収体56は、繊維の集合体により形成することができる。この繊維集合体としては、親水性を有することが好ましく、綿状パルプや合成繊維等の短繊維を積繊したものの他、セルロースアセテート等の合成繊維のトウ(繊維束)を必要に応じて開繊して得られるフィラメント集合体も使用できる。繊維目付けとしては、綿状パルプや短繊維を積繊する場合は、例えば120~200g/m2程度とすることができ、フィラメント集合体の場合は、例えば30~120g/m2程度とすることができる。合成繊維の場合の繊度は、例えば、1~16dtex、好ましくは1~10dtex、さらに好ましくは1~5dtexである。フィラメント集合体の場合、フィラメントは非捲縮繊維であってもよいが、捲縮繊維であるのが好ましい。捲縮繊維の捲縮度は、例えば、1インチ当たり5~75個、好ましくは10~50個、さらに好ましくは15~50個程度とすることができる。また、均一に捲縮した捲縮繊維を用いる場合が多い。
(Absorber)
The absorber 56 can be formed of an aggregate of fibers. The fiber assembly preferably has hydrophilicity, and a tow (fiber bundle) of synthetic fibers such as cellulose acetate is opened as needed in addition to those obtained by stacking short fibers such as cotton pulp and synthetic fibers. Filament aggregates obtained by fibering can also be used. The fiber basis weight can be, for example, about 120 to 200 g / m 2 when stacking cotton-like pulp or short fibers, and about 30 to 120 g / m 2 for filament aggregates, for example. Can do. The fineness in the case of synthetic fibers is, for example, 1 to 16 dtex, preferably 1 to 10 dtex, and more preferably 1 to 5 dtex. In the case of a filament aggregate, the filament may be a non-crimped fiber, but is preferably a crimped fiber. The crimped degree of the crimped fiber can be, for example, about 5 to 75, preferably 10 to 50, and more preferably about 15 to 50 per inch. Further, a crimped fiber that is uniformly crimped is often used.
 吸収体56は、前後方向中央CLから前側に物品全長L5の30~48%、及び後側に物品全長L5の25~45%延在している。吸収体56は長方形形状でも良いが、図6にも示すように、前端部56F、後端部56B及びこれらの間に位置し、前端部56F及び後端部56Bと比べて幅が狭い括れ部56Nとを有する砂時計形状を成していると、吸収体56自体とバリヤーカフス60,61の、脚回りへのフィット性が向上するため好ましい。具体的な寸法としては、吸収体前端部56Fの前後方向長さをL1とし、吸収体56と腹側外装シート12Fとの重なり部分における前後方向長さをL2とし、吸収体後端部56Bの前後方向長さをL3とし、吸収体56と背側外装シート12Bとの重なり部分における前後方向長さをL4とし、括れ部56Nの最小幅をW1とし、吸収体前端部56Fの幅及び吸収体後端部56Bの幅をW2としたとき、下記の式(1)~(4)を満足するように構成されていると、好ましい。
 70mm ≦ W1 < W2 ≦ 190mm …(1)
 0.5 ≦ W1/W2 ≦ 0.85 …(2)
 0mm ≦ L1-L2 ≦ 70mm …(3)
 0mm ≦ L3-L4 ≦ 50mm …(4)
The absorber 56 extends 30 to 48% of the total length L5 of the article from the center CL in the front-rear direction and 25 to 45% of the total length L5 of the article on the rear side. The absorber 56 may be rectangular, but as shown in FIG. 6, the front end portion 56F, the rear end portion 56B, and a constricted portion having a narrower width than those of the front end portion 56F and the rear end portion 56B. It is preferable to form an hourglass shape having 56N because the fit of the absorber 56 itself and the barrier cuffs 60, 61 around the legs is improved. As specific dimensions, the length in the front-rear direction of the absorber front end portion 56F is L1, the length in the front-rear direction at the overlapping portion between the absorber 56 and the ventral exterior sheet 12F is L2, and the length of the absorber rear end portion 56B is The length in the direction is L3, the length in the front-rear direction at the overlapping portion of the absorber 56 and the backside exterior sheet 12B is L4, the minimum width of the constricted portion 56N is W1, the width of the absorber front end portion 56F and the rear of the absorber When the width of the end portion 56B is W2, it is preferable that the end portion 56B is configured to satisfy the following expressions (1) to (4).
70 mm ≦ W1 <W2 ≦ 190 mm (1)
0.5 ≦ W1 / W2 ≦ 0.85 (2)
0mm ≤ L1-L2 ≤ 70mm (3)
0mm ≤ L3-L4 ≤ 50mm (4)
 W1及びW2が狭過ぎると、バリヤーカフス60,61の起立が不安定になり、また吸収量が不十分となり、広過ぎるとフィット性の低下により装着感が悪化する。
 また、上記数値範囲にあると、股間部においてはバリヤーカフス60,61の取付部分65近傍に吸収体56が存在しないため、バリヤーカフス60,61の動きの自由度が増し、バリヤーカフス60,61が幅方向外側に開き易く、肌に対して面で当たりやすくなり、脚の動きに対するフィット面の追従性も向上する。前後両側においては内装体200側部の吸収体56が十分な範囲に存在するため、これを基点(支点)としてバリヤーカフス60,61の起立が安定する。前後両側から股間部に至る部分は、バリヤーカフス60,61が内装体200の幅方向両側縁を基準として幅方向内側に起立した姿勢から幅方向外側に開いていく変位部であり、このバリヤーカフス60,61の姿勢変化が内装体200側部まで存在する吸収体56により支えられ、バリヤーカフス60,61の全体的な起立形状が安定する。上記数値範囲を外れ、括れ部が大きくなりすぎると、股間部においてはバリヤーカフス60,61の自由度が高くなりすぎ、かえって脚周りに隙間ができ易くなるおそれがあり、また股間部の前後両側においても基点(支点)が無いためにバリヤーカフス60,61の起立が不安定になるおそれがある。逆に括れ部が小さくなりすぎると、バリヤーカフス60,61の自由度が低下するので好ましくない。
If W1 and W2 are too narrow, the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 becomes unstable, and the amount of absorption becomes insufficient. If it is too wide, the fit feeling deteriorates due to a decrease in fit.
In addition, when the value is within the above numerical range, the absorber 56 does not exist in the vicinity of the attachment portion 65 of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 in the crotch portion. Therefore, the degree of freedom of movement of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 increases, and the barrier cuffs 60, 61 Is easy to open outward in the width direction, and it is easy to hit the skin with the surface, and the followability of the fit surface to the movement of the leg is improved. Since the absorber 56 on the side of the interior body 200 exists in a sufficient range on both the front and rear sides, the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 is stabilized with this as a base point (fulcrum). A portion extending from the front and rear sides to the crotch portion is a displacement portion in which the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 are opened outward from the posture in which the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 stand up inward in the width direction with reference to both side edges in the width direction. The posture change of 60, 61 is supported by the absorber 56 that exists up to the side of the interior body 200, and the overall standing shape of the barrier cuffs 60, 61 is stabilized. If the constricted part is too large outside the above numerical range, the degree of freedom of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 becomes too high in the crotch part, and there is a possibility that a gap is easily formed around the leg, and both the front and rear sides of the crotch part However, since there is no base point (fulcrum), the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 may become unstable. Conversely, if the constricted portion becomes too small, the degree of freedom of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 is lowered, which is not preferable.
 さらに、括れ部56N全体の前後方向長さL7は好ましくは80mm以上、特に好ましくは120~260mmとされる。括れ部56Nの前後方向長さL7が短過ぎるとバリヤーカフス60,61の自由度が低下するとともに、吸収体56の脚周りに対するフィット性が低下して脚の動きを妨げるようになり、長すぎるとバリヤーカフス60,61の起立が安定しなくなる。 Furthermore, the front-rear direction length L7 of the entire constricted portion 56N is preferably 80 mm or more, and particularly preferably 120 to 260 mm. If the length L7 in the front-rear direction of the constricted portion 56N is too short, the degree of freedom of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 is lowered, and the fit of the absorbent body 56 around the legs is lowered to prevent the movement of the legs, which is too long. And the standing of the barrier cuffs 60 and 61 becomes unstable.
 (高吸収性ポリマー粒子)
 吸収体56中にはその全体にわたり高吸収性ポリマー粒子を分散保持させるのが好ましい。高吸収性ポリマー粒子とは、「粒子」以外に「粉体」も含む。高吸収性ポリマー粒子の粒径は、この種の吸収性物品に使用されるものをそのまま使用でき、1000μm以下、特に150~400μmのものが望ましい。高吸収性ポリマー粒子の材料としては、特に限定無く用いることができるが、吸水量が40g/g以上のものが好適である。高吸収性ポリマー粒子としては、でんぷん系、セルロース系や合成ポリマー系などのものがあり、でんぷん-アクリル酸(塩)グラフト共重合体、でんぷん-アクリロニトリル共重合体のケン化物、ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースの架橋物やアクリル酸(塩)重合体などのものを用いることができる。高吸収性ポリマー粒子の形状としては、通常用いられる粉粒体状のものが好適であるが、他の形状のものも用いることができる。
(Superabsorbent polymer particles)
It is preferable to disperse and hold superabsorbent polymer particles throughout the absorber 56. Superabsorbent polymer particles include “powder” in addition to “particles”. As the particle diameter of the superabsorbent polymer particles, those used in this type of absorbent article can be used as they are, and those having a particle size of 1000 μm or less, particularly 150 to 400 μm are desirable. The material of the superabsorbent polymer particles can be used without any particular limitation, but those having a water absorption of 40 g / g or more are suitable. Superabsorbent polymer particles include starch, cellulose and synthetic polymers, such as starch-acrylic acid (salt) graft copolymer, saponified starch-acrylonitrile copolymer, and sodium carboxymethylcellulose cross-link. Or an acrylic acid (salt) polymer can be used. As the shape of the superabsorbent polymer particles, a commonly used granular material is suitable, but other shapes can also be used.
 高吸収性ポリマーとしては、抗菌物質と一体化したものを用いることができる。特に、ゼオライト中のイオン交換可能なイオンの一部または全部を銀イオンで置換してなるゼオライト粒子(以下、これを抗菌消臭性ゼオライトという)を高吸収性ポリマー中に含有させるか、あるいは抗菌消臭性ゼオライト粒子を高吸収性ポリマー粒子の表面に静電気により付着させてなる、抗菌消臭性高吸収性ポリマー粒子が好適である。 As the superabsorbent polymer, one integrated with an antibacterial substance can be used. In particular, zeolite particles obtained by substituting some or all of the ion-exchangeable ions in the zeolite with silver ions (hereinafter referred to as antibacterial deodorant zeolite) are contained in the superabsorbent polymer or antibacterial. Antibacterial deodorant superabsorbent polymer particles obtained by adhering deodorant zeolite particles to the surface of superabsorbent polymer particles by static electricity are suitable.
 高吸収性ポリマー粒子としては、吸水速度が40秒以下のものが好適に用いられる。吸水速度が40秒を超えると、吸収体56内に供給された液が吸収体56外に戻り出てしまう所謂逆戻りを発生し易くなる。 As the superabsorbent polymer particles, those having a water absorption rate of 40 seconds or less are preferably used. When the water absorption speed exceeds 40 seconds, so-called reversion in which the liquid supplied into the absorber 56 returns to the outside of the absorber 56 is likely to occur.
 また、高吸収性ポリマー粒子としては、ゲル強度が1000Pa以上のものが好適に用いられる。これにより、嵩高な吸収体56とした場合であっても、液吸収後のべとつき感を効果的に抑制できる。さらにまた、高吸収性ポリマーとしては吸水速度が50秒以下のものが好適である。 Further, as the superabsorbent polymer particles, those having a gel strength of 1000 Pa or more are preferably used. Thereby, even if it is a case where it is set as the bulky absorber 56, the sticky feeling after liquid absorption can be suppressed effectively. Furthermore, as the superabsorbent polymer, those having a water absorption speed of 50 seconds or less are suitable.
 高吸収性ポリマー粒子の含有量は、100~400g/m2程度であるのが好ましく、特に170~220g/m2の範囲内で、親水性繊維の含有量よりも高吸収性ポリマーの含有量のほうが多い、具体的には重量比較で繊維集合体1に対して高吸収性ポリマーが1.1~2.0、特に1.4~1.6程度となるように設定するのが好ましい。ポリマーの含有量が170g/m2未満では、トレーニング用途のみであれば使用可能であるが、着用者が排泄に気づかずに複数回排泄(排尿)した場合には吸収量が不足してもれることがあり、220g/m2を超えるとジャリジャリとした感触が着用者に伝わりやすく、トイレトレーニング中の着用者におむつを使用していることを強く意識させることとなる。 The content of the superabsorbent polymer particles is preferably about 100 to 400 g / m 2 , and particularly within the range of 170 to 220 g / m 2 , the content of the superabsorbent polymer is higher than the content of hydrophilic fibers. More specifically, it is preferable that the superabsorbent polymer is set to 1.1 to 2.0, particularly about 1.4 to 1.6 with respect to the fiber assembly 1 by weight comparison. If the polymer content is less than 170 g / m 2 , it can be used only for training purposes, but if the wearer urinates multiple times without being aware of excretion (urination), the amount of absorption may be insufficient. In some cases, if it exceeds 220 g / m 2 , a crisp feel is easily transmitted to the wearer, and the wearer during toilet training is strongly conscious of using a diaper.
 必要であれば、高吸収性ポリマー粒子は、吸収体56の平面方向で散布密度あるいは散布量を調整できる。たとえば、液の排泄部位を他の部位より散布量を多くすることができる。男女差を考慮する場合、男用は前側の散布密度(量)を高め、女用は中央部の散布密度(量)を高めることができる。また、吸収体56の平面方向において局所的(例えばスポット状)にポリマーが存在しない部分を設けることもできる。あるいは、吸収体56に後述するポケット部57を設ける場合は、ポケット部57の周囲には、高吸収性ポリマーが、前記吸収体のその他の領域と比較して最も高密度に配置されるようにすることもできる。具体的には、重量比較で繊維集合体1に対して高吸収性ポリマーが1.4~2.2程度となっているのが好ましい。また、高吸収性ポリマーを高密度に配置するのは、ポケット部57の前端部近傍のみとしてもよい。 If necessary, the superabsorbent polymer particles can adjust the spray density or spray amount in the plane direction of the absorber 56. For example, it is possible to increase the application amount of the liquid excretion site as compared to other sites. When gender differences are taken into account, men can increase the front spray density (amount), while women can increase the center spray density (amount). In addition, a portion where no polymer exists locally (for example, in a spot shape) in the planar direction of the absorber 56 can also be provided. Or when providing the pocket part 57 mentioned later in the absorber 56, the superabsorbent polymer is arrange | positioned around the pocket part 57 most densely compared with the other area | region of the said absorber. You can also Specifically, it is preferable that the superabsorbent polymer is about 1.4 to 2.2 with respect to the fiber assembly 1 by weight comparison. Further, the superabsorbent polymer may be arranged at a high density only in the vicinity of the front end portion of the pocket portion 57.
 (包装シート)
 包装シート58を用いる場合、その素材としては、ティッシュペーパ、特にクレープ紙、不織布、ポリラミ不織布、小孔が開いたシート等を用いることができる。ただし、高吸収性ポリマー粒子が抜け出ないような目の細かいシートであるのが望ましく、表面側からの温度変化を感知し易くするため、薄く低目付けのものが適当である。厚みは0.05~3mm程度、特に0.2mm以下、且つ目付けが5~25g/m2程度、特に15g/m2以下であると、裏面側から肌への伝熱性に優れるため好ましい。不織布を用いる場合は、スパンボンド法やSMS法により加工された不織布、特にSMS法により加工された不織布が、薄さと強度のバランスに優れる点で好適であり、その材質はポリプロピレン、ポリエチレン/ポリプロピレンなどを使用できる。
(Packaging sheet)
When the packaging sheet 58 is used, as the material, tissue paper, particularly crepe paper, non-woven fabric, polylaminated non-woven fabric, a sheet with small holes, or the like can be used. However, it is desirable that the sheet is a fine sheet from which the superabsorbent polymer particles do not come out, and a thin sheet having a low weight is appropriate for facilitating the sensing of temperature changes from the surface side. A thickness of about 0.05 to 3 mm, particularly 0.2 mm or less, and a basis weight of about 5 to 25 g / m 2 , particularly 15 g / m 2 or less are preferred because of excellent heat transfer from the back side to the skin. In the case of using a nonwoven fabric, a nonwoven fabric processed by the spunbond method or the SMS method, particularly a nonwoven fabric processed by the SMS method is preferable in terms of excellent balance between thinness and strength, and the material is polypropylene, polyethylene / polypropylene, etc. Can be used.
 なお、図示形態のように、吸収要素50の表面(着用者面)側に包装シート58の合わせ目を有する場合、着用者に効果的に温度変化を感知させるため、合わせ目の重なり幅58Wは温度変化物質40の配置領域の幅40Wより狭く、かつ寸法が40mm以下、特に20mm以下となっていることが好ましい。このように狭くしていても、上記理由により、高吸収性ポリマー粒子が脱出することは無い。また、包装シート58の合わせ目は、排尿口に当接する幅方向の中央を含まないように、側部寄りに形成するのも好ましい形態である。特に、身体側の包装シート58の合わせ目のシートの重なり部が、後述する温度変化物質を有する部分とは重ならないようになっていることが好ましい。 In addition, when the joint of the packaging sheet 58 is provided on the surface (wearer surface) side of the absorbent element 50 as illustrated, in order to make the wearer sense a temperature change effectively, the overlap width 58W of the joint is It is preferable that the arrangement region of the temperature change substance 40 is narrower than the width 40W and has a dimension of 40 mm or less, particularly 20 mm or less. Even if it is made narrow like this, the superabsorbent polymer particles will not escape for the above reasons. The seam of the packaging sheet 58 is also preferably formed near the side so as not to include the center in the width direction in contact with the urination port. In particular, it is preferable that the overlapping portion of the joint sheet of the packaging sheet 58 on the body side does not overlap with a portion having a temperature change substance described later.
 (股間部外装シート)
 内装体200の裏面側には、製品外面に露出する股間部外装シート12Mが設けられている。この股間部外装シート12Mの素材としては、腹側外装シート12F及び背側外装シート12Bと同様のものを用いることができるが、より高強度の素材や消臭剤を含有するもの等、腹側外装シート12F及び背側外装シート12Bとは異なる素材を用いることもできる。具体的には、PP、PP/PE、PP/PET等の繊維からなる、スパンボンド不織布、メルトブロー不織布、ポイントボンド不織布、エアスルー不織布、エアーポイント不織布、スパンレース不織布、SMS不織布等の各種不織布、あるいはこれに消臭剤等を添加したもの等を用いることができる。
(Crotch exterior sheet)
A crotch outer sheet 12M exposed on the outer surface of the product is provided on the back side of the inner body 200. As the material of the crotch outer sheet 12M, the same material as the abdominal outer sheet 12F and the back outer sheet 12B can be used, but a material containing a higher-strength material or a deodorant, etc. A material different from the exterior sheet 12F and the back-side exterior sheet 12B may be used. Specifically, various nonwoven fabrics such as spunbond nonwoven fabric, melt blown nonwoven fabric, point bond nonwoven fabric, air-through nonwoven fabric, air point nonwoven fabric, spunlace nonwoven fabric, SMS nonwoven fabric, and the like made of fibers of PP, PP / PE, PP / PET, or the like, or What added the deodorizer etc. to this can be used.
 股間部外装シート12Mには座位時に高い体圧がかかる。よって、摩擦堅牢度の高い(毛羽立たない)特性を有する素材が好ましい。
 股間部外装シート12Mは、印刷や着色を行い、デザイン要素を備えたシートとしてもよい。前述のデザインシートと併用する場合は、それぞれのデザインが重ならないように配置することが好ましい。
 股間部外装シート12Mとして伸縮不織布を用い、内装体200の長手方向に伸長して貼り付けると、股間部のフィット性が向上するため好ましい。
A high body pressure is applied to the crotch outer sheet 12M when sitting. Therefore, a material having a high friction fastness (not fuzzy) is preferable.
The crotch outer sheet 12M may be a sheet provided with design elements by printing or coloring. When used in combination with the above-described design sheet, it is preferable to dispose the designs so that they do not overlap.
It is preferable to use a stretchable nonwoven fabric as the crotch outer sheet 12M and to extend and paste in the longitudinal direction of the inner body 200 because the fit of the crotch part is improved.
 股間部外装シート12Mが幅方向側部から身体側面まで回り込み、バリヤーシート62の外面にホットメルト接着剤等により接着固定されていると、内装体200の両側部の剛性が向上する。このような形態においては、股間部外装シート12Mに剛度(コシ度)の高いシートを用いることが好ましい。具体的には、クラーク法(JISL1096 C法)によって測定される剛軟度の、シートのMD方向とCD方向との和が100mm以上、好ましくは150mm以上のシートを用いるとよい。 When the crotch outer sheet 12M wraps around from the side in the width direction to the side of the body and is bonded and fixed to the outer surface of the barrier sheet 62 with a hot melt adhesive or the like, the rigidity of both sides of the interior body 200 is improved. In such a form, it is preferable to use a sheet having high rigidity (roughness) as the crotch outer sheet 12M. Specifically, a sheet having a bending resistance measured by the Clark method (JISL1096 C method) and the sum of the MD direction and the CD direction of the sheet of 100 mm or more, preferably 150 mm or more may be used.
 図示例では、腹側及び背側外装シート12F,12Bと内装体200とが重なる部分において、股間部外装シート12Mは内装体200と腹側及び背側外装シート12F,12Bとの間に挟まれているが、腹側及び背側外装シート12F,12Bの外側に貼り付けることも可能である。股間部外装シート12Mは、ホットメルト接着剤等により内装体200の裏面、並びに腹側及び背側外装シート12F,12Bの内面若しくは外面に貼り付けられる。 In the illustrated example, the crotch outer sheet 12M is sandwiched between the inner body 200 and the abdominal and dorsal exterior sheets 12F and 12B where the abdomen and dorsal exterior sheets 12F and 12B overlap the interior body 200. However, it is also possible to affix them to the outside of the ventral and backside exterior sheets 12F and 12B. The crotch outer sheet 12M is affixed to the back surface of the inner body 200 and the inner or outer surfaces of the abdominal and back-side outer sheets 12F and 12B with a hot melt adhesive or the like.
 (温度変化物質)
 吸収体56には、物品前後方向中央CLから前側に物品全長L6の20%の部位を含むように、ポケット部57が形成されるとともに、このポケット部57内に、尿との接触により尿を冷却又は加熱する温度変化物質40が配置されている。ポケット部57の前端部と吸収体56の前端部との距離は、物品全長L6の5~30%であれば良いが、特に10~20%であることが好ましい。ポケット部57は厚みがその周囲の領域の厚みの平均値に対して0~50%であれば良いが、吸収体56を表裏方向に貫通するように形成されていることがより好ましい。ポケット部57が吸収体56を表裏方向に貫通するものであると、温度変化物質40を保持するポケット容積が大きくなるとともに、温度変化が装着者の身体へ効率良く伝達される。
(Temperature change material)
The absorbent body 56 is formed with a pocket portion 57 so as to include a portion of 20% of the overall length L6 of the article on the front side from the center CL in the longitudinal direction of the article. A temperature change material 40 for cooling or heating is arranged. The distance between the front end portion of the pocket portion 57 and the front end portion of the absorbent body 56 may be 5 to 30% of the total length L6 of the article, but is preferably 10 to 20%. The pocket portion 57 may have a thickness of 0 to 50% with respect to the average value of the thickness of the surrounding area, but is more preferably formed so as to penetrate the absorber 56 in the front and back direction. When the pocket part 57 penetrates the absorber 56 in the front and back direction, the pocket volume for holding the temperature change substance 40 is increased, and the temperature change is efficiently transmitted to the wearer's body.
 より詳細には、図示例のポケット部57は、物品前後方向中央CLから前側に物品全長L6の0~40%の範囲に収まるとともに、その前後方向長さ57Lが物品全長L6の10~20%、且つその幅57Wが吸収体56の全幅W2の25~60%となるように設けられている。温度変化物質40は、図示例のように吸収体56のうちポケット部57にのみ設けるのが、尿の拡散性を損ねない点及び費用対効果の点から好ましいが、ポケット部57以外の部分にも設けることができる。また、ポケット部57の形状は、図示例のような矩形状の他、三角形状、円状、楕円状等、適宜の形状とすることができる。また、本実施形態のようなパンツ型使い捨ておむつにおいては、図6のようにポケット部57が設けられる前後方向範囲が、腹側外装シート12Fの左右両側部のサイドシール部(溶着部12A)の下端部を結ぶ線を含むように配置されていると、排尿口から適度に離れ、かつ装着者の腹側部分に密着する領域に、効果的に温度変化がもたらされるため好ましい。ただし、吸収体56の腹側端部からの尿もれを防止するため、ポケット部57の前端と吸収体56の前端との距離は、20mm以上あることが好ましい。 More specifically, the pocket portion 57 in the illustrated example is within the range of 0 to 40% of the article total length L6 from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side, and the longitudinal length 57L is 10 to 20% of the article full length L6. In addition, the width 57W is provided to be 25 to 60% of the entire width W2 of the absorber 56. It is preferable that the temperature change substance 40 is provided only in the pocket portion 57 of the absorber 56 as shown in the illustrated example from the viewpoint of not impairing the diffusibility of urine and cost-effectiveness. Can also be provided. Moreover, the shape of the pocket part 57 can be set to an appropriate shape such as a triangular shape, a circular shape, or an elliptical shape in addition to a rectangular shape as shown in the illustrated example. Moreover, in the underpants type disposable diaper like this embodiment, the front-back direction range in which the pocket part 57 is provided like FIG. 6 is the side seal part (welding part 12A) of the right and left both sides of the abdominal exterior sheet 12F. Arranging so as to include a line connecting the lower end portions is preferable because a temperature change is effectively brought about in a region that is appropriately separated from the urination port and is in close contact with the abdomen portion of the wearer. However, in order to prevent urine leakage from the ventral end of the absorbent body 56, the distance between the front end of the pocket portion 57 and the front end of the absorbent body 56 is preferably 20 mm or more.
 温度変化物質40は、ポケット部57内の全体にわたり均等に設けられているのが好ましいが、部位によって量が異なっていても良い。 The temperature change material 40 is preferably provided uniformly throughout the pocket portion 57, but the amount may vary depending on the site.
 温度変化物質40は、尿に接触して溶解熱、水和熱、又は反応熱等により熱を吸収又は放出し、尿を冷却又は加熱するものである。尿への溶解により熱を吸収する温度変化物質40の例としては、酢酸ナトリウム、炭酸ナトリウム、硫酸ナトリウム、チオ硫酸ナトリウム、リン酸ナトリウム等の含水塩、硝酸アンモニウム、硝酸カリウム、塩化アンモニウム、塩化カリウム、硝酸ナトリウム等の無水塩、尿素、キシリトール、ソルビトール等の糖アルコール等を挙げることができる。尿への溶解により熱を放出する温度変化物質40の例としては、塩化アルミニウム、硫化アルミニウム、硫化アルミニウムカリウム等を挙げることができる。本発明では、これらのうち、吸熱作用を発現するソルビトール、キシリトールなどの糖アルコール又は尿素などの有機化合物を使用することが好ましい。特にソルビトールやキシリトールは、溶解性に極めて優れ、化学的安定性が良く、人体に悪影響を及ぼさないため、好適に使用できる。尿への溶解により吸熱又は放熱する物質を用いる場合、尿への溶解度が低いと、十分な温度変化を発揮できないため、温度20℃の100mlの水への溶解度が30g以上、特に50g以上であるものが好ましい。また、20cal/g以上の熱量変化を生じるものが好ましく、35cal/g以上の熱量変化を生じるものがより好ましい。また、単位面積当たりの熱量変化は1cal/cm2以上であることが好ましい。 The temperature change substance 40 is in contact with urine and absorbs or releases heat by heat of dissolution, heat of hydration, heat of reaction, etc., and cools or heats urine. Examples of the temperature change substance 40 that absorbs heat by dissolution in urine include hydrated salts such as sodium acetate, sodium carbonate, sodium sulfate, sodium thiosulfate, and sodium phosphate, ammonium nitrate, potassium nitrate, ammonium chloride, potassium chloride, nitric acid Examples thereof include anhydrous salts such as sodium, sugar alcohols such as urea, xylitol and sorbitol. Examples of the temperature change substance 40 that releases heat when dissolved in urine include aluminum chloride, aluminum sulfide, aluminum potassium sulfide, and the like. In the present invention, among these, it is preferable to use sugar alcohols such as sorbitol and xylitol that exhibit an endothermic effect, or organic compounds such as urea. In particular, sorbitol and xylitol can be suitably used because they are extremely excellent in solubility, have good chemical stability, and do not adversely affect the human body. When using a substance that absorbs heat or dissipates heat by dissolving in urine, if the solubility in urine is low, sufficient temperature change cannot be exhibited, so the solubility in 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C. is 30 g or more, particularly 50 g or more. Those are preferred. Moreover, what produces the calorie | heat amount change of 20 cal / g or more is preferable, and what produces the calorie | heat amount change of 35 cal / g or more is more preferable. Moreover, it is preferable that the calorie | heat amount change per unit area is 1 cal / cm < 2 > or more.
 尿との反応により熱を吸収又は放出する物質の例としては、オルトエステル類、又はメントンを炭素量が1ないし8のアルコール或いは炭素量が2ないし8のポリオールと反応させて得られるメントンケタルのようなケタル類、及びそれらの構造的又は光学的異性体を挙げることができる。また、尿により膨潤することにより熱を吸収又は放出する温度変化物質40の例としては、軽く架橋結合し部分的に中和されたポリアクリル酸を挙げることができる。
 温度変化物質40は、粒子状(粉体状含む)のものが好適に用いられるが、繊維状等の他の形状のものを用いることもできる。
Examples of substances that absorb or release heat by reaction with urine include orthoesters, or Menton ketal obtained by reacting menthone with alcohols having 1 to 8 carbon atoms or polyols having 2 to 8 carbon atoms. Ketals and their structural or optical isomers. Examples of the temperature change substance 40 that absorbs or releases heat by swelling with urine include polyacrylic acid that is lightly cross-linked and partially neutralized.
The temperature change substance 40 is preferably in the form of particles (including powder), but other shapes such as fibers can also be used.
 また、前述のような排泄インジケータ80がポケット部57と重なる形態、特に排泄インジケータ80が吸収体56を上下方向に貫通するように設けられるポケット部57と重なる形態では、保管中の空気中の水分(湿気)の接触、あるいは使用中の着用者の汗や体から放散される水分の接触によって、排泄していないのに排泄インジケータが変色してしまうことがある。しかし、温度変化物質40が吸湿性を有する物質、例えば上述のような水への溶解度が高く表面積の大きい粒子状をなすもの(具体例としては粒子状のソルビトールやキシリトールが好適である)であると、上記のような予期せぬ排泄インジケータの変色を防止することができる。 Further, in the form in which the excretion indicator 80 overlaps with the pocket part 57 as described above, in particular in the form in which the excretion indicator 80 overlaps with the pocket part 57 provided so as to penetrate the absorber 56 in the vertical direction, the moisture in the air during storage Due to contact with (humidity) or contact with moisture from the wearer's sweat or body in use, the excretion indicator may be discolored even though it is not excreted. However, the temperature-changing substance 40 is a hygroscopic substance, for example, a substance having a high water solubility and a large surface area as described above (particularly, particulate sorbitol or xylitol is preferable). And the above-mentioned unexpected discoloration of the excretion indicator can be prevented.
 かくして構成されたおむつにおいては、排尿時に表面シート30を透過し、吸収体56に吸収された尿が拡散作用により前側に十分に移動した後に、ポケット部57内の温度変化物質40と接触する。これにより、ポケット部57内では温度変化が発生し、その温度変化が吸収体56を介さずに、装着者の腹側部分に伝達される。このように、十分に拡散移動した後の尿が温度変化に寄与する構造であると、先に供給された尿により発生する温度変化が後に供給される尿の温度により弱まる又は打ち消されるといった現象を抑制でき、温度変化物質40の使用量に見合った温度変化が発現する。しかも、その十分な温度変化はポケット部(表裏貫通部)57で発生するため、断熱され難く、身体へ効率良く伝達される。さらに、図示形態の場合、十分な大きさのポケット部57がほぼ装着者の腹部又は下腹部に位置しており、装着者の腹部又は下腹部は身体表面において相対的に膨出しているため、ポケット部57内における温度変化部位に近接し易く、ポケット部57内における温度変化が装着者に伝わり易くなる。 In the diaper thus configured, after passing through the surface sheet 30 during urination and the urine absorbed by the absorbent body 56 has sufficiently moved to the front side by the diffusion action, it contacts the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket portion 57. Thereby, a temperature change occurs in the pocket portion 57 and the temperature change is transmitted to the abdomen portion of the wearer without passing through the absorber 56. Thus, if the urine after sufficiently diffusing and moving has a structure that contributes to the temperature change, the phenomenon that the temperature change generated by the urine supplied earlier is weakened or canceled by the temperature of the urine supplied later. The temperature change corresponding to the usage amount of the temperature change substance 40 can be suppressed. Moreover, since the sufficient temperature change occurs in the pocket portion (front and back through portion) 57, it is difficult to be insulated and is efficiently transmitted to the body. Furthermore, in the case of the illustrated form, the pocket portion 57 having a sufficiently large size is located substantially in the wearer's abdomen or lower abdomen, and the wearer's abdomen or lower abdomen bulges relatively on the body surface. It is easy to approach the temperature change part in the pocket part 57, and the temperature change in the pocket part 57 is easily transmitted to the wearer.
 温度変化物質40を含むポケット部57は、図10に示すように、物品前後方向中央CLに対して前側に物品全長L6の25~45%の位置から、物品前後方向中央CLに対して後側に物品全長L6の20~40%の位置まで、物品の幅方向中央に沿って、且つ幅が吸収体56の全幅W2の25~60%で延在させるのも好ましい形態である。この形態では、温度変化物質を40含むポケット部57が排尿位置を含むように延在しているため、尿量が少ない場合でも、多い場合でも十分な温度変化を発生させることができる利点がある。なお、図示例のポケット部57は、長方形状に設けられているが、上記寸法範囲内において三角形状等、適宜の形状とすることができる。その他は上記形態と基本的に同様であるため、敢えて説明を省略する。 As shown in FIG. 10, the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 is located on the rear side with respect to the article longitudinal direction center CL from the position of 25 to 45% of the article total length L6 on the front side with respect to the article longitudinal direction center CL. It is also preferable that the width is extended to the position of 20 to 40% of the total length L6 of the article along the center in the width direction of the article and 25 to 60% of the total width W2 of the absorbent body 56. In this embodiment, since the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 extends so as to include the urination position, there is an advantage that a sufficient temperature change can be generated even when the amount of urine is small or large. . Although the pocket portion 57 in the illustrated example is provided in a rectangular shape, it can be formed in an appropriate shape such as a triangular shape within the above size range. Others are basically the same as the above embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.
 また、図11に示すように、温度変化物質40を含むポケット部57は、吸収体56の中央領域55を取り囲むように環状に形成し、その線幅57Bを物品全長L6の5~10%程度とするのも好ましい。この場合、中央領域55は、物品前後方向中央CLから前側に物品全長L6の15~35%、及び後側に物品全長L6の15~35%、物品の幅方向中央に沿って延在し、且つ幅が吸収体56の全幅W2の40~75%とするのが好ましい。この形態では、吸収体56に吸収された尿が、排泄位置からどの方向に拡散したとしても、温度変化物質40を含むポケット部57に到達し、温度変化物質40と接触させることができる。よって、より多くの尿をポケット部57内の温度変化物質40と接触させることができる、あるいは尿の拡散方向が偏っても確実にポケット部57内の温度変化物質40と接触させることができる。その他は上記形態と基本的に同様であるため、敢えて説明を省略する。 Further, as shown in FIG. 11, the pocket portion 57 containing the temperature change substance 40 is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the central region 55 of the absorber 56, and the line width 57B is about 5 to 10% of the total length L6 of the article. It is also preferable that In this case, the central region 55 extends along the center in the width direction of the article by 15 to 35% of the article total length L6 on the front side and 15 to 35% of the article full length L6 on the rear side from the article longitudinal center CL. The width is preferably 40 to 75% of the entire width W2 of the absorber 56. In this form, the urine absorbed by the absorber 56 can reach the pocket portion 57 including the temperature change substance 40 and come into contact with the temperature change substance 40 no matter which direction the urine diffuses from the excretion position. Therefore, more urine can be brought into contact with the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket part 57, or even if the diffusion direction of urine is biased, it can be brought into contact with the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket part 57 with certainty. Others are basically the same as the above embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.
 温度変化物質の使用量は適宜定めることができるが、温度変化物質として糖アルコールを用いる場合、物品における総含有量は4~20g程度、特にトイレトレーニング用おむつの場合は8~12g程度であるのが好ましい。また、温度変化物質40を有する部分における温度変化物質の目付け(単位面積当たりの含有量)は、200~1200g/m2程度、特にトイレトレーニング用おむつの場合は400~600g/m2程度であるのが好ましい。 The amount of the temperature change substance can be determined as appropriate, but when sugar alcohol is used as the temperature change substance, the total content in the article is about 4 to 20 g, particularly about 8 to 12 g for toilet training diapers. Is preferred. In addition, the basis weight (content per unit area) of the temperature change substance in the portion having the temperature change substance 40 is about 200 to 1200 g / m 2 , and particularly about 400 to 600 g / m 2 in the case of a toilet training diaper. Is preferred.
 ここで、装着者に排尿を明瞭に知覚させるためには、表面シート30の表面において4度以上、特に5度以上の温度変化があると好ましい。具体的に、上述の各形態において、表面シート30と吸収要素50との間に他の部材を有しない場合、このような温度変化を達成するためには、次の条件を満足するように構成するのが好ましい。
 液透過性表面シート30の素材:不織布。
 液透過性表面シート30の厚み:0.1~0.5mm。
 液透過性表面シート30の目付けが10~40g/m2
 包装シート58の素材:クレープ紙またはSMS不織布。
 包装シート58の厚み:0.05~0.2mm。
 包装シート58の目付け:5~25g/m2
 温度変化物質40の種類:尿への溶解により吸熱反応を起し、尿を冷却するもの。
 温度変化物質40の溶解度(温度20℃の100mlの水に対する):30g以上、特に50g以上。
 ポケット部57の総面積:2500~8000mm2
 ポケット部57内における温度変化物質の目付け(温度変化物質の総使用量をポケット部の総面積で除した値。他に同じ。):500~1000g/m2
Here, in order for the wearer to clearly perceive urination, it is preferable that there is a temperature change of 4 degrees or more, particularly 5 degrees or more on the surface of the topsheet 30. Specifically, in each of the above-described embodiments, when there is no other member between the topsheet 30 and the absorbent element 50, in order to achieve such a temperature change, the following conditions are satisfied. It is preferable to do this.
The material of the liquid-permeable surface sheet 30: non-woven fabric.
The thickness of the liquid-permeable top sheet 30: 0.1 to 0.5 mm.
The basis weight of the liquid-permeable surface sheet 30 is 10 to 40 g / m 2 .
The material of the packaging sheet 58: crepe paper or SMS nonwoven fabric.
The thickness of the packaging sheet 58: 0.05 to 0.2 mm.
The weight of the packaging sheet 58: 5 to 25 g / m 2 .
Type of temperature change substance 40: A substance that causes an endothermic reaction when dissolved in urine and cools urine.
Solubility of temperature changing substance 40 (for 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C.): 30 g or more, in particular 50 g or more.
Total area of the pocket portion 57: 2500 to 8000 mm 2 .
Temperature change substances basis weight in the pocket portion 57 (. Divided by the total area of the pocket portion the total amount of the temperature changing substance other the same.): 500 ~ 1000g / m 2.
 <温度変化実験>
 (例1)
 図1~図10に示す構造のパンツ型使い捨ておむつを作製した。細部の仕様は以下のとおりとした。
 液透過性表面シート30:厚み2mm、目付け25g/m2のPE/PP複合繊維からなるエアスルー不織布。
 包装シート58:厚み1mm、目付けが15g/m2のクレープ紙。
 吸収体56の寸法:前後方向中央を基準として前側に205mmの位置から後側に190mmの位置まで、且つ幅方向中央を基準として、左側に70mmの位置から右側に70mmの位置まで。面積は55,300mm2
 温度変化物質40の種類:ソルビトール(溶解熱はマイナス26cal/g、東和化成工業株式会社製「ソルビット」)
 温度変化物質40の溶解度(温度20℃の100mlの水に対する):70g。
 ポケット部57の寸法:全長70mm、全幅40mmの矩形範囲で、前端部は吸収体56の前端部から75mm離間している。面積は2800mm2
 ポケット部57内における温度変化物質40の目付け:500g/m2
 吸収体56の構成:パルプ繊維及び高吸収性ポリマー粒子(吸収体56の厚み方向及びこれと直交する方向に均一に分散されている)。
 吸収体56におけるパルプ目付け:110g/m2
 吸収体56における高吸収性ポリマーの目付け:160g/m2
 高吸収性ポリマーの吸収速度:35秒。
 (例2)
 図13に示すように、吸収体56上面の所定範囲に温度変化物質40を所定量散布した以外は、例1と同様の構造のパンツ型使い捨ておむつを作製した。細部の仕様は以下のとおりとした。
 液透過性表面シート30:厚み2mm、目付け25g/m2のPE/PP複合繊維からなるエアスルー不織布。
 包装シート58:厚み1mm、目付けが15g/m2のクレープ紙。
 吸収体56の寸法:前後方向中央を基準として前側に205mmの位置から後側に190mmの位置まで、且つ幅方向中央を基準として、左側に70mmの位置から右側に70mmの位置まで。面積は55,300mm2
 温度変化物質40の種類:ソルビトール(溶解熱はマイナス26cal/g、東和化成工業株式会社製「ソルビット」)
 温度変化物質40の溶解度(温度20℃の100mlの水に対する):70g。
 温度変化物質40を有する部分の寸法:前後方向中央を基準として前側に160mmの位置から後側に40mmの位置まで、且つ幅方向中央を基準として、左側に50mmの位置から右側に50mmの位置までの矩形範囲。面積は20,000mm2
 温度変化物質40を有する部分における温度変化物質40の目付け:500g/m2
 吸収体56の構成:パルプ繊維及び高吸収性ポリマー粒子(吸収体56の厚み方向及びこれと直交する方向に均一に分散されている)。
 吸収体56におけるパルプ目付け:110g/m2
 吸収体56における高吸収性ポリマーの目付け:160g/m2
 高吸収性ポリマーの吸収速度:35秒。
 (例3)
 吸収体56にポケット部57及び温度変化物質40を設けない点以外は、例1と同様の構成を有するパンツ型使い捨ておむつを例3として作製した。
<Temperature change experiment>
(Example 1)
A pants-type disposable diaper having the structure shown in FIGS. 1 to 10 was produced. Detailed specifications are as follows.
Liquid-permeable surface sheet 30: an air-through nonwoven fabric composed of PE / PP composite fibers having a thickness of 2 mm and a basis weight of 25 g / m 2 .
Packaging sheet 58: crepe paper having a thickness of 1 mm and a basis weight of 15 g / m 2 .
Dimensions of absorber 56: From a position of 205 mm on the front side to the position of 190 mm on the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and from a position of 70 mm on the left side to a position of 70 mm on the right side with respect to the center in the width direction. The area is 55,300 mm 2 .
Type of temperature change substance 40: Sorbitol (The heat of dissolution is minus 26 cal / g, “Sorbit” manufactured by Towa Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
Solubility of temperature changing substance 40 (for 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C.): 70 g.
Dimensions of pocket part 57: The front end part is separated from the front end part of the absorber 56 by 75 mm in a rectangular range with a total length of 70 mm and a total width of 40 mm. The area is 2800 mm 2 .
The basis weight of the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket part 57: 500 g / m 2 .
Composition of absorber 56: Pulp fiber and superabsorbent polymer particles (dispersed uniformly in the thickness direction of absorber 56 and in the direction perpendicular thereto).
Pulp weight in the absorbent body 56: 110 g / m 2 .
The basis weight of the superabsorbent polymer in the absorber 56: 160 g / m 2 .
Absorption rate of superabsorbent polymer: 35 seconds.
(Example 2)
As shown in FIG. 13, a pants-type disposable diaper having a structure similar to that of Example 1 was prepared except that a predetermined amount of the temperature change substance 40 was sprayed in a predetermined range on the upper surface of the absorber 56. Detailed specifications are as follows.
Liquid-permeable surface sheet 30: an air-through nonwoven fabric composed of PE / PP composite fibers having a thickness of 2 mm and a basis weight of 25 g / m 2 .
Packaging sheet 58: crepe paper having a thickness of 1 mm and a basis weight of 15 g / m 2 .
Dimensions of absorber 56: From a position of 205 mm on the front side to the position of 190 mm on the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and from a position of 70 mm on the left side to a position of 70 mm on the right side with respect to the center in the width direction. The area is 55,300 mm 2 .
Type of temperature change substance 40: Sorbitol (The heat of dissolution is minus 26 cal / g, “Sorbit” manufactured by Towa Kasei Kogyo Co., Ltd.)
Solubility of temperature changing substance 40 (for 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C.): 70 g.
Dimensions of the portion having the temperature change material 40: from the position of 160 mm on the front side to the position of 40 mm on the rear side with respect to the center in the front-rear direction and from the position of 50 mm on the left side to the position of 50 mm on the right side with respect to the center in the width direction Rectangular range of. The area is 20,000 mm 2 .
The basis weight of the temperature change substance 40 in the portion having the temperature change substance 40: 500 g / m 2 .
Composition of absorber 56: Pulp fiber and superabsorbent polymer particles (dispersed uniformly in the thickness direction of absorber 56 and in the direction perpendicular thereto).
Pulp weight in the absorbent body 56: 110 g / m 2 .
The basis weight of the superabsorbent polymer in the absorber 56: 160 g / m 2 .
Absorption rate of superabsorbent polymer: 35 seconds.
(Example 3)
A pants-type disposable diaper having the same configuration as in Example 1 except that the pocket portion 57 and the temperature change substance 40 are not provided in the absorbent body 56 was produced as Example 3.
 (実験方法及び実験結果)
 温度37℃、量50ccの人工尿をビーカーに用意し、この人工尿を、おむつの前後方向中央且つ幅方向中央の表面に対して約15cm上方から3秒程度で供給した後、おむつの前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の70mm離れた幅方向中央位置(ポケット部57の前端部近傍)において、直径5cmの範囲を非接触型の温度計で所定時間毎に測定した。
(Experimental method and experimental results)
Prepare artificial urine with a temperature of 37 ° C and a volume of 50 cc in a beaker, and supply this artificial urine from the center of the diaper in the front-rear direction and the center in the width direction in about 3 seconds from the upper side in about 3 seconds, At a center position in the width direction (near the front end of the pocket portion 57) 70 mm away from the center to the front side of the entire article, a range of 5 cm in diameter was measured every predetermined time with a non-contact type thermometer.
 測定結果のグラフを図12に示した。このグラフからも判るように、本発明に係る例1は、例2と比べて、温度の低下速度が速く、且つ最低温度が低いものであり、しかもその最低温度を十分な時間維持できるものであった。 The graph of the measurement results is shown in FIG. As can be seen from this graph, Example 1 according to the present invention has a faster temperature decrease rate and a lower minimum temperature than Example 2, and can maintain the minimum temperature for a sufficient time. there were.
 <他の好ましい形態>
 粒子状の温度変化物質40を用いる場合、温度変化物質40を固定せず、ポケット部57内で移動できるように構成しても良いが、おむつの内部で温度変化物質40の粒子状物が自由に移動し、排尿時の温度変化が不十分となるおそれがあるため、温度変化物質40の移動を防止する手段を講じることができる。例えば、ポケット部57の底部を構成するシート(図示形態の場合は包装シート58)に温度変化物質40を接着剤等の固定手段により固定することもできる。
<Other preferred forms>
When the particulate temperature change material 40 is used, the temperature change material 40 may be configured to move within the pocket portion 57 without being fixed. However, the particulate matter of the temperature change material 40 is free inside the diaper. Since the temperature change during urination may be insufficient, a means for preventing the temperature change substance 40 from moving can be taken. For example, the temperature change substance 40 can be fixed to a sheet (a packaging sheet 58 in the illustrated case) constituting the bottom of the pocket portion 57 by a fixing means such as an adhesive.
 また、粒子状の温度変化物質40を加熱して溶融し、これを固化させることにより、固体の状態で配置することができ、温度変化物質40は自由に移動できる状態の粒子状分を有さず、あるいは少量しか有さず、大部分は移動しないようにすることもできる。 Further, the particulate temperature change substance 40 is heated and melted and solidified to be arranged in a solid state, and the temperature change substance 40 has a particulate matter in a state where it can freely move. It is also possible to have only a small amount or not to move the majority.
 この形態のものを製造する際に、温度変化物質40とともに加熱される部材がある場合には、温度変化物質40の融点が温度変化物質40とともに加熱される部材よりも低い物質であるのが望ましい。すなわち、使い捨ておむつは通常ポリエチレンやポリプロピレン等の熱可塑性樹脂を含むため、温度変化物質40はこれらの樹脂と同じかそれよりも低い融点を有することが望ましい。一般的な熱可塑性樹脂の中で特に融点の低いポリエチレンは、通常100~130℃程度の融点を有するため、温度変化物質の融点は130℃以下であることが好ましく、100℃以下であることがより好ましい。また、製品保管時に温度変化物質40が融解しないよう、70℃以上の融点を有することが好ましい。このような温度変化物質40としては、融点が通常約95~110℃程度(純度によって若干異なる)であるソルビトール及びキシリトールを挙げることができる。 When manufacturing a member of this form, if there is a member heated together with the temperature change substance 40, it is desirable that the melting point of the temperature change substance 40 is lower than that of the member heated together with the temperature change substance 40. . That is, since disposable diapers usually contain a thermoplastic resin such as polyethylene or polypropylene, it is desirable that the temperature changing substance 40 has a melting point that is the same as or lower than those resins. Among general thermoplastic resins, polyethylene having a particularly low melting point usually has a melting point of about 100 to 130 ° C. Therefore, the melting point of the temperature changing substance is preferably 130 ° C. or less, and preferably 100 ° C. or less. More preferred. Moreover, it is preferable to have melting | fusing point of 70 degreeC or more so that the temperature change substance 40 may not melt | dissolve at the time of product storage. Examples of such a temperature change substance 40 include sorbitol and xylitol having a melting point of about 95 to 110 ° C. (varies depending on purity).
 また、温度変化物質40は、加熱して溶融した状態でおむつの内部に、あるいはおむつを構成する部材に対して適用するため、特に温度変化物質40が隣接する部材が不織布や吸収体56のように繊維集合体である場合、温度変化物質40の溶融時の粘度が低いと、繊維間隙に浸透し難くなり付着力が低下するおそれがある。また、温度変化物質40の溶融時の粘度が高いと所定の部位への配置が困難である。この観点から、温度変化物質40としては、溶融時の温度(例えば70~130℃)における粘度が5~80ポアズのものが好ましい。 Moreover, since the temperature change material 40 is applied to the inside of the diaper in a state where it is heated and melted or to a member constituting the diaper, the member adjacent to the temperature change material 40 is particularly a nonwoven fabric or an absorbent body 56. In the case of a fiber assembly, if the temperature change substance 40 has a low viscosity at the time of melting, it is difficult to penetrate into the fiber gap and the adhesion may be reduced. Moreover, if the viscosity of the temperature change substance 40 at the time of melting is high, it is difficult to place the temperature change substance 40 at a predetermined site. From this viewpoint, the temperature changing substance 40 preferably has a viscosity of 5 to 80 poise at a melting temperature (for example, 70 to 130 ° C.).
 特に、温度変化物質40を加熱して溶融したものを、周囲に隣接する部材に融着固定することで、温度変化物質40の移動が無くなり、融着領域(例えば股間部)で確実に温度変化機能が発揮されるようになる。また、温度変化物質40の融着部位は、その上下の部材を接着固定するための接着部としての効果も期待できる。 In particular, a material obtained by heating and melting the temperature change material 40 is fused and fixed to a member adjacent to the periphery, so that the temperature change material 40 does not move, and the temperature change reliably occurs in the fusion region (for example, the crotch portion). The function comes to be demonstrated. Moreover, the fusion | bonding site | part of the temperature change substance 40 can also anticipate the effect as an adhesion part for adhering and fixing the upper and lower members.
 温度変化物質40の融着部位は、周囲に隣接する部材であれば特に限定は無いが、図示例の場合、吸収体56及び包装シート58の少なくとも一方とすることができる。温度変化物質40を融着させる場合、その融着部位はポケット部57内の全体とするのが好ましいが、一部とすることもでき、ポケット部57外に温度変化物質40を含有する場合にはその温度変化物質も周囲に隣接する部材に融着させることができる。 The fusion site of the temperature change substance 40 is not particularly limited as long as it is a member adjacent to the periphery, but in the illustrated example, it can be at least one of the absorber 56 and the packaging sheet 58. When the temperature change substance 40 is to be fused, the fusion site is preferably the entire inside of the pocket portion 57, but can also be a part of the temperature change substance 40, when the temperature change substance 40 is contained outside the pocket portion 57. The temperature changing substance can be fused to the adjacent member.
 温度変化物質40を吸収体56等の融着対象に融着する方法としては、粒子状(粉体状含む)若しくは短繊維状等の適宜形状の温度変化物質40を融着対象部材の上面の所定部位に載せた後、又は融着対象部材の内部の所定部位に含有(複数の部材間に挟む場合も含む)させた後に、温度変化物質40を融着対象部材とともに加熱し、温度変化物質40のみを溶融状態として融着対象部材の繊維に付着させた後、冷却して温度変化物質40を固化させる方法を用いることができる(第1の手法)。この第1の手法によると、温度変化物質40の量や加熱時間等の条件にもよるが、融着対象部材に対して溶融前よりも小さな粒子状の温度変化物質や、溶融した複数の温度変化物質が一体化した塊状の温度変化物質40が多数箇所に付着した状態となるか、これらが連続して膜状又は骨格状等の温度変化物質40が付着した状態となる。 As a method of fusing the temperature change substance 40 to the fusion target such as the absorber 56, the temperature change substance 40 having an appropriate shape such as a particle (including powder) or short fiber is formed on the upper surface of the fusion target member. After being placed on a predetermined part or contained in a predetermined part inside the fusion target member (including when sandwiched between a plurality of members), the temperature change substance 40 is heated together with the fusion target member, and the temperature change substance It is possible to use a method in which only the temperature 40 is melted and attached to the fibers of the member to be fused, and then cooled to solidify the temperature change substance 40 (first method). According to the first method, although depending on conditions such as the amount of the temperature change material 40 and the heating time, the temperature change material in the form of particles smaller than that before melting or a plurality of melted temperatures are obtained. The bulky temperature change material 40 in which the change materials are integrated is attached to many places, or these are continuously attached to the temperature change material 40 such as a film or a skeleton.
 他の手法としては、吸収性物品の技術分野で用いられているホットメルト接着剤の塗布に倣って、温度変化物質40の溶融液を融着対象部材の所定部位にノズル等を用いて塗布し、冷却固化させる方法も用いることができる(第2の手法)。 As another method, following the application of the hot melt adhesive used in the technical field of absorbent articles, a melt of the temperature change substance 40 is applied to a predetermined part of the member to be fused using a nozzle or the like. A method of cooling and solidifying can also be used (second method).
 第1の手法において、温度変化物質40を融着対象部材の内部に含有させる場合、融着対象部材の製造原料(繊維等)に粒子状等の温度変化物質40を混合する他、融着対象部材が繊維集合体のように外部から内部に至る隙間を有するものである場合には、粒子状の温度変化物質40を、初速度を与えて自由落下よりも勢いよく融着対象部材に散布することにより、温度変化物質40を融着対象部材内に侵入させることもできる。 In the first method, when the temperature change substance 40 is contained in the fusion target member, the temperature change substance 40 such as particulates is mixed with the manufacturing raw material (fiber or the like) of the fusion target member. When the member has a gap extending from the outside to the inside like a fiber assembly, the particulate temperature change material 40 is applied to the fusion target member more vigorously than the free fall by giving an initial velocity. Accordingly, the temperature change substance 40 can be allowed to enter the fusion target member.
 第1の手法における加熱手段は特に限定されないが、例えば図16~図19に示す手段を採用することができる。図16及び図17に示す手段は、高温の空気の通過により加熱を図るエアスルードライヤーを利用するものである。図16に示す手段では、温度変化物質40を所定部分に配置した融着対象部材300を、ベルトコンベヤー301により搬送しながら、搬送面に対して直交する方向に通される熱風302により加熱した後、同じく搬送面に対して直交する方向に通される風303により冷却する、というものである。また、図17(a)及び(b)に示す手段は、温度変化物質40を所定部分に配置した融着対象部材300を、高温空気が供給される加熱室310内に設置されたサクションロール311に巻き掛けて移送しつつ、サクションロール311外側から内側に通される熱風312により加熱した後、加熱室310外に設置されたクーリングロール313に巻き掛けて移送することにより冷却する、というものである。 The heating means in the first method is not particularly limited, but for example, the means shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 can be employed. The means shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 utilize an air-through dryer that heats by passing high-temperature air. In the means shown in FIG. 16, after the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged at a predetermined portion is conveyed by the belt conveyor 301 and heated by hot air 302 that is passed in a direction orthogonal to the conveyance surface. In the same manner, cooling is performed by the wind 303 that is passed in a direction orthogonal to the conveying surface. 17 (a) and 17 (b) is a suction roll 311 in which a fusion target member 300 in which a temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion is installed in a heating chamber 310 to which high-temperature air is supplied. It is heated by hot air 312 passed from the outside to the inside of the suction roll 311 while being wound around and then cooled by being wound around and transferred to a cooling roll 313 installed outside the heating chamber 310. is there.
 また、図18に示す加熱手段は、温度変化物質40を所定部分に配置した融着対象部材300を、加熱ロール320に巻き掛けて移送することにより、加熱ロール320の熱を接触により温度変化物質に対して伝達し、片面側から加熱するというものである。 Further, the heating means shown in FIG. 18 wraps and transfers the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion around the heating roll 320, thereby bringing the heat of the heating roll 320 into contact with the temperature change substance. It heats from one side.
 さらに、図19に示す加熱手段は、温度変化物質40を所定部分に配置した融着対象部材300を、少なくとも一方が加熱ロールからなる一対のロール330,331、340,341間に通すことにより、加熱ロールの熱を接触により温度変化物質に対して伝達し、加熱するというものである。この場合、同図(a)に示すように、両ロール330,331を表面が平滑なスムースロールとし、融着対象部材300に凹凸を形成しないようにしても、同図(b)に示すように、いずれか一方のロール340を表面に所定パターンの凹凸を有するエンボスロールとし、融着対象部材300の一方の面に凹凸を形成しても良い。特に、後者の場合、エンボスロール340の凸部パターンを、温度変化物質の融着部分の領域だけに合せて形成しておき、当該領域のみを加熱するように構成するのも好ましい。融着部分が形成されるのは、エンボスロール340の凸部パターンに対応する領域のみであるため、温度変化物質40は、エンボスロール340の凸部パターンよりも広い範囲に配置してもよい。このように、融着対象部材300を部分的に加熱する方法を用いれば、融着対象部材300の所定の領域のみに温度変化物質40を配置する必要はなく、例えば融着対象部材300の全面に温度変化物質40を配置し、所定の領域のみを部分的に加熱することにより、部分的に融着部分を形成することも可能である。また、エンボスロール340の凸部パターンを、複数段階の高さを有するものとすると、温度変化物質40が厚く融着する部分と薄く融着する部分とを分けて形成することも可能である。 Furthermore, the heating means shown in FIG. 19 passes the fusion target member 300 in which the temperature change substance 40 is arranged in a predetermined portion between a pair of rolls 330, 331, 340, 341, at least one of which is a heating roll, The heat of the heating roll is transmitted to the temperature change substance by contact and heated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 6A, both rolls 330 and 331 are smooth rolls with smooth surfaces and no irregularities are formed on the fusion target member 300, as shown in FIG. Alternatively, any one of the rolls 340 may be an embossing roll having a predetermined pattern of unevenness on the surface, and the unevenness may be formed on one surface of the fusion target member 300. In particular, in the latter case, it is also preferable that the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340 is formed only in the region where the temperature change substance is fused, and only that region is heated. Since the fusion part is formed only in the region corresponding to the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340, the temperature change substance 40 may be arranged in a wider range than the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340. Thus, if the method of partially heating the fusion target member 300 is used, it is not necessary to arrange the temperature change substance 40 only in a predetermined region of the fusion target member 300. For example, the entire surface of the fusion target member 300 It is also possible to partially form the fused portion by disposing the temperature change substance 40 and heating only a predetermined region. Further, if the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340 has a plurality of heights, it is possible to separately form a portion where the temperature change material 40 is fused thickly and a portion where the temperature change material 40 is thinly fused.
 第1の手法における温度変化物質40の加熱溶融は、融着対象部材の製造時のみならず、その後の製造過程の適宜段階、例えば内装体200の組立完了状態(製品状態までの組立完了前)、又は製品状態までの組立完了後に、内装体200やおむつ全体に対して行うこともできる。この場合における加熱方法としては、例えば前述した図16~図19に示す手段を応用することができる。 The heating and melting of the temperature change material 40 in the first method is performed not only at the time of manufacturing the member to be fused, but also at an appropriate stage in the subsequent manufacturing process, for example, the assembly completion state of the interior body 200 (before assembly to the product state). Alternatively, after the assembly to the product state is completed, the inner body 200 and the entire diaper can be performed. As a heating method in this case, for example, the means shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 described above can be applied.
 第1の手法において融着対象部材に融着された温度変化物質40は、一度融解して液状化した後固化するため、表面積が小さくなっている。従って、温度変化物質40における尿との接触面積が小さくなるため、温度変化速度が抑えられ、持続性が向上する。ただし、一律に温度変化速度が遅くなると、着用者が温度変化を知覚し難くなるおそれがある。そこで、温度変化物質40として嵩密度が低い粒子状物を用い、その全てを溶融させず、一部を溶融させて嵩密度の高い固体にし、残りは嵩密度の低い粒子状物のままで残す(融着してもしなくても良い)ようにするのも好ましい形態である。粒子状の温度変化物質40は、同程度の粒径であれば、嵩密度が低いほど表面積が大きく、尿との接触効率が高いため、温度変化速度が速くなる。特に温度変化物質40が尿に溶解して温度変化が生じる場合にはこの傾向が顕著である。よって、前述したように、温度変化物質40の一部のみを溶融させる場合、粒子状を維持する温度変化物質40は温度変化作用が素速く生じ、溶融固化した温度変化物質40は、温度変化作用が遅れて生じるようになるため、速効性と遅効性とを兼ね備えた温度変化が得られる。このような温度変化の速効性と遅効性のバランスを取るためには、粒子状分の残存割合は、30~70重量%程度が適当である。さらに、温度変化物質40の移動防止という観点からは、粒子状分の残存割合は0~50重量%程度が適当である。従って、粒子状分の残存割合は、30~50重量%とするのが好ましい。 The surface-change material 40 fused to the member to be fused in the first method has a small surface area because it is once melted and liquefied and then solidified. Therefore, since the contact area with the urine in the temperature change substance 40 becomes small, the temperature change speed is suppressed and the sustainability is improved. However, if the rate of temperature change is uniformly reduced, the wearer may have difficulty perceiving the temperature change. Therefore, a particulate matter having a low bulk density is used as the temperature change substance 40, and not all of the particulate matter is melted, but a part thereof is melted to form a solid having a high bulk density, and the rest is left as a particulate matter having a low bulk density. It is also a preferable form to do (it does not need to be fused). If the particle-like temperature change substance 40 has the same particle size, the lower the bulk density, the larger the surface area and the higher the contact efficiency with urine, and thus the temperature change speed becomes faster. This tendency is particularly remarkable when the temperature change substance 40 is dissolved in urine to cause a temperature change. Therefore, as described above, when only a part of the temperature change substance 40 is melted, the temperature change substance 40 that maintains the particulate state has a quick temperature change action, and the melted and solidified temperature change substance 40 has a temperature change action. Therefore, a temperature change having both fast and slow effects can be obtained. In order to balance the rapid effect and slow effect of such a temperature change, the residual ratio of the particulate matter is suitably about 30 to 70% by weight. Further, from the viewpoint of preventing the movement of the temperature change substance 40, the remaining proportion of the particulate matter is suitably about 0 to 50% by weight. Therefore, the residual ratio of the particulate matter is preferably 30 to 50% by weight.
 嵩密度の低い粒子状の温度変化物質40としては、顆粒、表面凹凸の多い形状の粒子、表面や内部に微細な孔を有する粒子等の多孔質粒子が好適である。嵩密度の程度は適宜定めれば良いが、真密度の50%以下である(見かけの体積に対して50%以上の空隙(空間)を有する)のが好ましい。例えば、ソルビトールの場合、真密度は1.50g/cm3なので、好ましい嵩密度は0.75g/cm3以下であり、0.50~0.70g/cm3がより好ましく、0.55~0.65g/cm3が特に好ましい。また、粒子径が大きいと、見かけの嵩密度は小さいが、表面積は大きくないため、粒子状の温度変化物質40を用いる場合、その平均粒径(JIS K 1474-2007 メジアン径)が200~600μmであることが好ましい。 As the particulate temperature change substance 40 having a low bulk density, porous particles such as granules, particles having many surface irregularities, and particles having fine pores on the surface or inside thereof are suitable. The degree of the bulk density may be determined as appropriate, but is preferably 50% or less of the true density (having a void (space) of 50% or more with respect to the apparent volume). For example, in the case of sorbitol, the true density is so 1.50 g / cm 3, preferably bulk density is 0.75 g / cm 3 or less, more preferably 0.50 ~ 0.70g / cm 3, 0.55 ~ 0 .65 g / cm 3 is particularly preferred. In addition, when the particle size is large, the apparent bulk density is small, but the surface area is not large. Therefore, when the particulate temperature change material 40 is used, the average particle size (JIS K 1474-2007 median diameter) is 200 to 600 μm. It is preferable that
 以上に述べた方法により温度変化物質40をおむつ内部に、あるいはおむつを構成する部材に対して融着することができるが、それだけでは融着部分が硬質化し、装着感が硬くなり、身体に対するフィット性も低下する。よって、次述の柔軟化手段が組み合わされる。すなわち、第1の手段は、温度変化物質40の融着部分を含む部分に機械的な圧力を加え、融着した温度変化物質40を砕くものである。このような処理は、融着対象部材をロール間に挟んで加圧すると連続処理が可能なため好ましい。加圧に際しては加熱を伴っても良いが、温度変化物質を砕き難くなるため加熱せずに加圧するのが好ましい。 According to the method described above, the temperature change substance 40 can be fused inside the diaper or to a member constituting the diaper, but only by this, the fused part becomes hard, the wearing feeling becomes hard, and the body fits. The nature is also reduced. Therefore, the following softening means are combined. In other words, the first means applies mechanical pressure to the portion including the fused portion of the temperature change material 40 to break the fused temperature change material 40. Such a treatment is preferable because a continuous treatment can be performed by pressing the member to be fused between the rolls. The pressurization may be accompanied by heating, but it is preferable to pressurize without heating because the temperature change substance is difficult to break.
 加圧加工は、対象部分の全体に行う他、部分的に、例えばいわゆるエンボス加工等により散点状に行うこともできる。図14は、後者の加圧形態を示しており、符号45は加圧部を示し、符号46は非加圧部を示している。後者の加圧形態の場合、加圧部45の中心間隔45dは前後方向及び幅方向ともに2~25mmの範囲内とするのが好ましい。また、加圧部45及び非加圧部46を有する部分における単位面積当たりの非加圧部46の面積割合は20~70%程度、特に30~50%程度とするのが好ましい。加圧部45の間隔が広過ぎたり、非加圧部46の面積が大き過ぎたりすると柔軟化が不十分となり易く、加圧部45の間隔が狭過ぎたり、非加圧部46の面積が小さ過ぎたりすると融着部分の全体を砕くのと殆ど同じになり、粉砕時に融着対象部材から離脱する温度変化物質40の量が増加する。また、加圧部45の配列は適宜定めることができ、図14(a)示すような行列状とする他、図14(b)に示すような千鳥状とすることもできる。加圧加工により、砕かれて細分化した温度変化物質40の一部が、融着された部材から遊離しておむつ内部を自由に移動できる状態になる。この遊離物(粒子状分)は少ないほうが好ましく、具体的には温度変化物質40全体の0~30重量%程度、特に0~10重量%である。なお、本発明における、おむつ内を自由に移動できる状態の粒子状分とは、おむつを構成する部材に対して固定されておらず少なくとも平面方向に自由に移動可能なものであれば粒状や粉状のものに限らず、短繊維状やブロック状など、適宜の形状を含むものとする。ただし、個々の「粒子」については、任意の方向で長さを測定した時の最大長さが30mm以下、かつ最大重量1g以下のものとする。もちろん、「粒子」が大きすぎると着用時の違和感を伴うため、実際には最大長さは10mm以下、かつ最大重量は0.2g以下程度である。 The pressing process can be performed on the entire target part, or partially, for example, in the form of dots by so-called embossing. FIG. 14 shows the latter pressurization form, where reference numeral 45 indicates a pressurizing part and reference numeral 46 indicates a non-pressurizing part. In the case of the latter pressurizing form, the center interval 45d of the pressurizing part 45 is preferably in the range of 2 to 25 mm in both the front-rear direction and the width direction. Further, the area ratio of the non-pressurized portion 46 per unit area in the portion having the pressurizing portion 45 and the non-pressurized portion 46 is preferably about 20 to 70%, particularly about 30 to 50%. If the interval between the pressurizing parts 45 is too wide or the area of the non-pressurizing part 46 is too large, the flexibility tends to be insufficient, the interval between the pressurizing parts 45 is too narrow, or the area of the non-pressurizing part 46 is too small. If it is too small, it becomes almost the same as crushing the entire fusion part, and the amount of the temperature change substance 40 that is detached from the fusion target member during crushing increases. Further, the arrangement of the pressurizing portions 45 can be determined as appropriate, and can be a staggered pattern as shown in FIG. 14B in addition to a matrix as shown in FIG. A part of the temperature change material 40 crushed and subdivided by the pressurization is released from the fused member and can move freely inside the diaper. It is preferable that the amount of free substances (particulate matter) is small, specifically, about 0 to 30% by weight, particularly 0 to 10% by weight, based on the whole temperature change substance 40. In the present invention, the particulate matter in a state where it can freely move in the diaper is granular or powder as long as it is not fixed to the member constituting the diaper and can be freely moved at least in the plane direction. It is not limited to the shape, and includes an appropriate shape such as a short fiber shape or a block shape. However, the individual “particles” have a maximum length of 30 mm or less and a maximum weight of 1 g or less when the length is measured in an arbitrary direction. Of course, if the “particles” are too large, there is a sense of incongruity when worn, so the maximum length is actually 10 mm or less and the maximum weight is about 0.2 g or less.
 第2の手段は、図15に示すように、温度変化物質40の融着部分を前後方向及び幅方向の少なくとも一方の方向に間欠的となるパターン(すなわち融着部分と非融着部分とを交互に)で設けるものである。より詳細には、図15(a)に示す例は、前後方向に沿って連続する筋状又は帯状の温度変化物質40の融着部分が、幅方向に間隔47を空けて複数列設けられているものである。また、図15(b)に示す例は、適宜形状の温度変化物質40の融着部分が前後方向及び幅方向の両方に間欠的となるパターンで配列されているものである。この場合における温度変化物質40の融着部分の形状は、図示例では矩形状であるが、菱形状や、三角形状、円形状でも良い。また、温度変化物質40の融着部分の配列は、図示例では行列状であるが、千鳥状等、任意の配列とすることができる。温度変化物質40の融着部分の間隔は適宜定めることができるが、前後方向及び幅方向ともに3~15mm程度とするのが好ましい。また個々の温度変化物質40の間欠方向における幅48は3~40mm程度、特に5~10mm程度とするのが好ましい。温度変化物質40の融着部分間の間隔47が広過ぎたり、幅48が狭すぎたりすると温度変化物質40の保持量が不足するおそれがあり、間隔47が狭過ぎたり幅48が広すぎたりすると柔軟化が不足するおそれがある。 As shown in FIG. 15, the second means is a pattern in which the fusion portion of the temperature change substance 40 is intermittent in at least one of the front-rear direction and the width direction (that is, a fusion portion and a non-fusion portion). Provided alternately). More specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 15A, a plurality of rows of fusion portions of the stripe-like or belt-like temperature change material 40 that are continuous along the front-rear direction are provided at intervals 47 in the width direction. It is what. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 15B, the fusion portions of the temperature change material 40 having an appropriate shape are arranged in a pattern that is intermittent in both the front-rear direction and the width direction. In this case, the shape of the fused portion of the temperature change substance 40 is rectangular in the illustrated example, but may be a rhombus, triangle, or circle. In addition, the arrangement of the fusion parts of the temperature change material 40 is a matrix in the illustrated example, but may be an arbitrary arrangement such as a staggered pattern. The interval between the fused portions of the temperature change material 40 can be determined as appropriate, but is preferably about 3 to 15 mm in both the front-rear direction and the width direction. The width 48 in the intermittent direction of each temperature change substance 40 is preferably about 3 to 40 mm, particularly about 5 to 10 mm. If the interval 47 between the fused portions of the temperature change material 40 is too wide or the width 48 is too narrow, the amount of the temperature change material 40 may be insufficient, and the interval 47 is too narrow or the width 48 is too wide. Then, there is a risk that flexibility will be insufficient.
 このような温度変化物質40の融着部分の間欠配置は、温度変化物質40を融着対象部材に対して所定の間欠パターンで配置した後に加熱する他、加熱パターンを間欠的(部分的)としたり、温度変化物質40の溶融液を所定の間欠パターンで塗布したりすることによって製造できる。第2の手段においても、温度変化物質40の非融着分(粒子状分)は、0~30重量%程度、特に0~10重量%であることが好ましい。 Such intermittent arrangement of the fusion portion of the temperature change material 40 is performed after the temperature change material 40 is arranged in a predetermined intermittent pattern with respect to the fusion target member, and the heating pattern is intermittent (partial). Or by applying a melt of the temperature change substance 40 in a predetermined intermittent pattern. Also in the second means, the non-fused part (particulate part) of the temperature change substance 40 is preferably about 0 to 30% by weight, particularly 0 to 10% by weight.
 第3の手段は、粒子状等の多数の温度変化物質40を含有する部分において、温度変化物質40の30~90重量%(特に50~70重量%であるのが好ましい)が融着されるとともに、残部(70~10重量%、特に50~30重量%)の温度変化物質40が融着されていない状態とするものである。このように、温度変化物質40の融着比率を抑えることによっても、温度変化物質40の融着による硬質化を低減することができる。このような形態は、前述した第2の融着手法を用いる場合は製造できないが、第1の手法において、融着対象部材の所定範囲に温度変化物質40を配置した状態で、その温度変化物質40の10~90重量%が融着し、且つ残部が融着しない程度に加熱することで製造することができる。なお、第1~第3の手段は、いずれか2つ又は3つを組み合わせて採用することができる。 In the third means, 30 to 90% by weight (particularly 50 to 70% by weight) of the temperature change material 40 is fused in a part containing a large number of temperature change materials 40 such as particles. At the same time, the remainder (70 to 10% by weight, particularly 50 to 30% by weight) of the temperature change substance 40 is not fused. As described above, by suppressing the fusion ratio of the temperature change substance 40, it is possible to reduce the hardening due to the fusion of the temperature change substance 40. Such a form cannot be manufactured when the above-described second fusion technique is used, but in the first technique, the temperature change substance 40 is disposed in a state where the temperature change substance 40 is disposed in a predetermined range of the fusion target member. It can be produced by heating so that 10 to 90% by weight of 40 is fused and the remainder is not fused. The first to third means can be used in combination of any two or three.
 これらの手法による柔軟化の程度は適宜調整することができるが、おむつにおける温度変化物質40の融着部分を有する部分の剛性が、15~50cN/50mm、特に20~35cN/50mmとなるのが好ましい。ちなみに、温度変化物質40の融着部分を有しない部分の剛性は、1~25cN/50mm、特に5~15cN/50mm程度であるのが好ましく、通常の場合、温度変化物質40の融着部分を有する部分と有しない部分との剛性差は5~20cN/50mm程度であるのが好ましい。 The degree of softening by these methods can be adjusted as appropriate, but the rigidity of the portion having the fused portion of the temperature change substance 40 in the diaper is 15 to 50 cN / 50 mm, particularly 20 to 35 cN / 50 mm. preferable. Incidentally, the rigidity of the portion of the temperature change material 40 that does not have the fused portion is preferably about 1 to 25 cN / 50 mm, particularly about 5 to 15 cN / 50 mm. The difference in rigidity between the portion having and not having is preferably about 5 to 20 cN / 50 mm.
 なお、剛性とは、曲げ剛性(剛度)のことを意味し、JIS K 7171(プラスチック‐曲げ剛性の試験方法)に準拠し、次の方法で測定する。測定にはテンシロン試験機(圧子先端部の曲率半径R1=5.0±0.1mm、支持プレート先端部の曲率半径R2=5.0±0.2mm)を用い、内装体200の製品前後方向の曲げ剛性を測定する。試験片は、内装体200から測定に影響する弾性伸縮部材を取り除き、これをおむつ長手方向80mm、おむつ幅方向50mmの長方形に切り取ることにより作製する。曲げ剛性値の単位中の50mmは試験片の短辺の長さであり、試験時の圧子でたわませた試験片の幅である。それぞれ断面円弧状の先端部を有し、両先端部の先端(上端)間の間隔を位置を揃えて配置された一対の支持プレート上に、上記の試験片を、その長手方向を各プレートに直交する方向に向けて、掛け渡すように載置し、その試験片に僅かに接するように圧子先端部を配置する。ロードセル5kg(レンジ196cN)、速度30mm/minの条件で圧子を降下させ、荷重‐たわみ曲線を得る。得られた曲げ応力の最大値を曲げ剛性値(cN/50mm)とする。なお、測定対象となる部位が上記サンプリング寸法より小さい場合は、小スケールの試験片で測定を行い、寸法比に基づいて比例計算にて換算する。 The rigidity means bending rigidity (rigidity), and is measured according to the following method in accordance with JIS K-7171 (plastic-bending rigidity test method). For the measurement, a tensilon tester (curvature radius R1 = 5.0 ± 0.1 mm at the tip of the indenter, curvature radius R2 = 5.0 ± 0.2 mm at the tip of the support plate) was used, and the product 200 of the interior 200 Measure the bending stiffness. The test piece is prepared by removing the elastic elastic member that affects the measurement from the inner body 200 and cutting it into a rectangle having a diaper longitudinal direction of 80 mm and a diaper width direction of 50 mm. 50 mm in the unit of the flexural rigidity value is the length of the short side of the test piece, and is the width of the test piece bent with the indenter at the time of the test. Each test piece is placed on a pair of support plates, each having an arcuate cross-sectional tip, and the gap between the tips (upper ends) of both tips is aligned. The indenter tip is placed so as to be stretched over in the orthogonal direction and slightly in contact with the test piece. A load-deflection curve is obtained by lowering the indenter under conditions of a load cell of 5 kg (range 196 cN) and a speed of 30 mm / min. Let the maximum value of the obtained bending stress be a bending rigidity value (cN / 50 mm). In addition, when the site | part used as a measuring object is smaller than the said sampling dimension, it measures with a small scale test piece, and converts it by proportional calculation based on a dimension ratio.
 柔軟性を損ねずに温度変化物質40の移動を防止する他の手法として、温度変化物質40を繊維状(あるいは綿状)としてポケット部内に設けることも提案される(図示省略)。繊維状の温度変化物質40の層は柔軟であるため、温度変化物質40を有する部分であっても硬質化は殆ど起こらない。また、表面積が大きく層間に細かな空隙部を有するため、水(尿)への溶解が速やかである。さらにおむつ内で自由に移動することがない。もちろん、おむつ内で移動可能な粒子状分はほとんど残らない。 As another method for preventing the movement of the temperature change material 40 without impairing flexibility, it is also proposed to provide the temperature change material 40 in the pocket portion as a fiber (or cotton) (not shown). Since the fibrous layer of the temperature change material 40 is flexible, even the portion having the temperature change material 40 is hardly hardened. Moreover, since it has a large surface area and fine voids between layers, dissolution in water (urine) is quick. Furthermore, it does not move freely within the diaper. Of course, there is almost no particulate matter that can move in the diaper.
 温度変化物質40を繊維状の層とするために、一般的な繊維技術やあるいはホットメルト接着剤の塗布技術を応用することができる。代表的な技術としては、繊維技術であればスパンボンド法やメルトブローン法、ホットメルト接着剤塗布技術であればカーテンスプレー法が挙げられる。これらの方法においては、それぞれ異なる形態のノズルユニットを用いて繊維状物を得るが、ノズルユニットが溶融物を糸状に吐出する多数の吐出口とエアー噴出口とを備える点では共通している。溶融状態でノズルユニットに供給された温度変化物質40は、吐出口から吐出される。そして、吐出口から吐出された温度変化物質40は、エアー噴出口より噴射されるエアーによって、繊維状とされて、コンベア上あるいはおむつを構成する部材上に散布され、フィラメント状繊維(連続繊維)の集合体の層を形成する。なお、上記エアーは加熱エアーであるのが好ましい。加熱エアーの温度は、温度変化物質40の融点と同じか又はこれよりも50℃以上高い温度であるのが好ましく、該融点よりも50~120 ℃ 高い温度が更に好ましい。また、エアーの噴射圧は、1.0~3.0kg/cm3であるのが好ましい。 In order to make the temperature change substance 40 into a fibrous layer, a general fiber technique or a hot melt adhesive application technique can be applied. Representative techniques include the spunbond method and melt blown method for fiber technology, and the curtain spray method for hot melt adhesive application technology. In these methods, fibrous materials are obtained by using different types of nozzle units, but the nozzle unit is common in that it includes a large number of outlets and air outlets for discharging the melt in a string form. The temperature change substance 40 supplied to the nozzle unit in a molten state is discharged from the discharge port. And the temperature change substance 40 discharged from the discharge port is made into a fiber by the air jetted from the air outlet, and is sprayed on the conveyor or on the member constituting the diaper, and filamentous fibers (continuous fibers) Forming a layer of aggregates. The air is preferably heated air. The temperature of the heated air is preferably the same as or higher than the melting point of the temperature change substance 40 by 50 ° C. or more, more preferably 50 to 120 ° C. higher than the melting point. The air injection pressure is preferably 1.0 to 3.0 kg / cm 3 .
 また、ワタアメの製造方法に倣って綿状の温度変化物質40の堆積物を形成し、これを適宜成形あるいはカットして用いることもできる。温度変化物質40が砂糖に似た性状を示す糖アルコールである場合は、このようにワタアメの製造技術を応用することもまた好適な方法である。 Also, following the cotton candy manufacturing method, a cotton-like deposit of the temperature change substance 40 can be formed, and this can be used after being shaped or cut as appropriate. When the temperature change substance 40 is a sugar alcohol having properties similar to sugar, it is also a suitable method to apply the cotton candy manufacturing technique in this way.
 繊維状の温度変化物質40は必ずしも融着される必要は無い。溶融した温度変化物質40の繊維状物の一部は、おむつを構成する部材に融着することにより、強固に固定することができるが、前述のように繊維状の層であるだけでおむつ内の移動防止には十分である。但し、この繊維状の層を積極的に接着のための層として用いることも可能である。温度変化物質40の繊維の太さは適宜定めることができるが、1~1000dtex程度とすることができ、特に1~4dtex程度であるのが好ましい。 The fibrous temperature change material 40 does not necessarily need to be fused. A part of the molten fibrous substance of the temperature change substance 40 can be firmly fixed by fusing to a member constituting the diaper. It is enough to prevent the movement of However, it is also possible to positively use this fibrous layer as a layer for adhesion. The fiber thickness of the temperature change material 40 can be determined as appropriate, but can be about 1 to 1000 dtex, and particularly preferably about 1 to 4 dtex.
 繊維状の温度変化物質40の層を設ける部位や、温度変化物質40の使用量、剛性等、他の点については前述の主たる形態における温度変化物質40の融着部分と同様であるため、敢えて説明を省略する。 Since other parts such as the portion where the layer of the fibrous temperature change material 40 is provided, the amount of use of the temperature change material 40, rigidity, and the like are the same as the fusion part of the temperature change material 40 in the main form described above, dare Description is omitted.
 他方、温度変化物質40の移動は、前述のとおり吸収性物品内部の適宜の部材に温度変化物質を融着することで解決することができるが、温度変化物質40が融着した部分は硬くなり、吸収性物品の柔軟性を損ねるおそれがある。そこで、図20(a)及び図21に示すように、ポケット部57内の温度変化物質40が、その表面側部材(包装シート58における吸収体56の表面側に位置する部分)と、裏面側部材(包装シート58における吸収体56の裏面側に位置する部分)との間に挟まれるとともに、その一部41のみが枠状に表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着し、残部42は非融着粒子として枠状融着部分により囲まれる部分に移動可能な状態で封じ込められている、形態も提案される。 On the other hand, the movement of the temperature change substance 40 can be solved by fusing the temperature change substance to an appropriate member inside the absorbent article as described above, but the part where the temperature change substance 40 is fused becomes hard. The flexibility of the absorbent article may be impaired. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 21, the temperature change substance 40 in the pocket portion 57 includes the front surface side member (portion located on the front surface side of the absorbent body 56 in the packaging sheet 58) and the back surface side. It is sandwiched between members (portions on the back side of the absorbent body 56 in the packaging sheet 58), and only a part 41 thereof is fused to the front side member and the back side member in a frame shape, and the remaining part 42 is not A form is also proposed in which the particles are enclosed in a movable state in a portion surrounded by a frame-like fusion portion as fusion particles.
 枠状融着部分41の内側は、表裏方向は表面側部材及び裏面側部材である包装シート58により囲まれ、周囲は枠状融着部分41により囲まれているため、その内側に配置された非融着の粒子状温度変化物質42は、枠状融着部分41の範囲内でしか移動できない。よって、温度変化物質40の移動を抑制され、所期の温度変化が発生するようになる。しかも、温度変化物質40の融着部分41は枠状であるため、全体を面状に融着するよりも格段に柔軟となり、温度変化物質の融着による硬質化も抑制することができる。 The inner side of the frame-shaped fusion part 41 is surrounded by the packaging sheet 58 that is the front-side member and the rear-side member in the front and back direction, and the periphery is surrounded by the frame-like fusion part 41, so The non-fused particulate temperature change substance 42 can move only within the range of the frame-like fused portion 41. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change substance 40 is suppressed, and an expected temperature change occurs. In addition, since the fused portion 41 of the temperature change substance 40 has a frame shape, it becomes much more flexible than fusing the whole in a planar shape, and it is possible to suppress hardening due to fusion of the temperature change substance.
 枠状融着部分41は、一つのみでも良いが、ある程度小さな大きさで多数設けるのが好ましい。また、後者の場合、四角形や円形の枠状融着部分を多数設けることもできるが、図示のように格子状パターンの融着部分41を設けるのが好ましい。格子状パターンとしては、前後方向に沿う融着線と幅方向に沿う融着線とからなるパターンの他、図22に示すように、前後方向及び幅方向と交差する斜め方向に沿う融着線のみからなる斜め格子パターンとすることもできる。格子状パターンは、図22(a)に示すように、各融着線が連続線状をなしていても良いが、図22(b)に示すように、温度変化物質の融着部M及び非融着部Nが交互に列なる点線状の融着線からなり、各交差位置においていずれか一方の融着線が他方の融着線の非融着部Nを隙間を空けて通るパターンや、図22(c)に示すように、温度変化物質の融着部M及び非融着部Nが交互に列なる点線状の融着線からなり、各交差位置において両方の融着線の非融着部Nが位置するパターンであると、温度変化物質の融着部分41が不連続となることにより、融着部分41による硬質化がより一層軽減されるため、好ましい。 The number of the frame-like fused portions 41 may be only one, but it is preferable to provide a large number with a somewhat small size. In the latter case, a large number of quadrangular or circular frame-like fused portions can be provided, but it is preferable to provide a lattice-shaped fused portion 41 as shown in the figure. As a lattice pattern, in addition to a pattern composed of a fusion line along the front-rear direction and a fusion line along the width direction, as shown in FIG. 22, a fusion line along an oblique direction intersecting with the front-rear direction and the width direction. It is also possible to use an oblique lattice pattern consisting of only the above. In the grid pattern, as shown in FIG. 22A, each fusion line may be a continuous line, but as shown in FIG. The non-fused portion N is composed of dotted welded lines alternately arranged, and at each crossing position, either one of the fused wires passes through the non-fused portion N of the other fused wire with a gap, As shown in FIG. 22 (c), the fusion part M and the non-fusion part N of the temperature change material are composed of dotted fusion lines that are alternately arranged, and the non-bonding of both fusion lines at each intersection position. The pattern in which the fusion part N is located is preferable because the fusion part 41 of the temperature change substance becomes discontinuous, and the hardening by the fusion part 41 is further reduced.
 具体的に、おむつにおいて温度変化物質40の融着部分を有する部分の剛性は、15~50cN/50mm、特に20~35cN/50mmであるのが好ましい。ちなみに、温度変化物質40の融着部分を有しない部分の剛性は、1~25cN/50mm、特に5~15cN/50mm程度であるのが好ましく、通常の場合、温度変化物質40の融着部分を有する部分と有しない部分との剛性差は5~20cN/50mm程度であるのが好ましい。 Specifically, the rigidity of the part having the fusion part of the temperature change substance 40 in the diaper is preferably 15 to 50 cN / 50 mm, particularly preferably 20 to 35 cN / 50 mm. Incidentally, the rigidity of the portion of the temperature change material 40 that does not have the fused portion is preferably about 1 to 25 cN / 50 mm, particularly about 5 to 15 cN / 50 mm. The difference in rigidity between the portion having and not having is preferably about 5 to 20 cN / 50 mm.
 なお、剛性とは、曲げ剛性(剛度)のことを意味し、JIS K 7171(プラスチック‐曲げ剛性の試験方法)に準拠し、次の方法で測定する。測定にはテンシロン試験機(圧子先端部の曲率半径R1=5.0±0.1mm、支持プレート先端部の曲率半径R2=5.0±0.2mm)を用い、内装体200の製品前後方向の曲げ剛性を測定する。試験片は、内装体200から測定に影響する弾性伸縮部材を取り除き、これをおむつ長手方向80mm、おむつ幅方向50mmの長方形に切り取ることにより作製する。曲げ剛性値の単位中の50mmは試験片の短辺の長さであり、試験時の圧子でたわませた試験片の幅である。それぞれ断面円弧状の先端部を有し、両先端部の先端(上端)間の間隔を位置を揃えて配置された一対の支持プレート上に、上記の試験片を、その長手方向を各プレートに直交する方向に向けて、掛け渡すように載置し、その試験片に僅かに接するように圧子先端部を配置する。ロードセル5kg(レンジ196cN)、速度30mm/minの条件で圧子を降下させ、荷重‐たわみ曲線を得る。得られた曲げ応力の最大値を曲げ剛性値(cN/50mm)とする。なお、測定対象となる部位が上記サンプリング寸法より小さい場合は、小スケールの試験片で測定を行い、寸法比に基づいて比例計算にて換算する。 The rigidity means bending rigidity (rigidity), and is measured according to the following method in accordance with JIS K-7171 (plastic-bending rigidity test method). For the measurement, a tensilon tester (curvature radius R1 = 5.0 ± 0.1 mm at the tip of the indenter, curvature radius R2 = 5.0 ± 0.2 mm at the tip of the support plate) was used, and the product 200 of the interior 200 Measure the bending stiffness. The test piece is prepared by removing the elastic elastic member that affects the measurement from the inner body 200 and cutting it into a rectangle having a diaper longitudinal direction of 80 mm and a diaper width direction of 50 mm. 50 mm in the unit of the flexural rigidity value is the length of the short side of the test piece, and is the width of the test piece bent with the indenter at the time of the test. Each test piece is placed on a pair of support plates, each having an arcuate cross-sectional tip, and the gap between the tips (upper ends) of both tips is aligned. The indenter tip is placed so as to be stretched over in the orthogonal direction and slightly in contact with the test piece. A load-deflection curve is obtained by lowering the indenter under conditions of a load cell of 5 kg (range 196 cN) and a speed of 30 mm / min. Let the maximum value of the obtained bending stress be a bending rigidity value (cN / 50 mm). In addition, when the site | part used as a measuring object is smaller than the said sampling dimension, it measures with a small scale test piece, and converts it by proportional calculation based on a dimension ratio.
 枠状融着部分41の寸法は適宜定めることができるが、枠線の幅41wは1~5mm程度であるのが好ましく、枠内側の面積は100~1000mm2程度であるのが好ましい。格子状の融着パターンを有する場合、交差位置間の長さ(中心間隔)41dは10~40mm程度、交差角度θ(枠内側の角度)は60~120度であるのが好ましい。さらに、前述の点線状の融着線からなる格子状パターンを採用する場合、各融着線における融着部Mの長さをLとし、隙間をdとしたとき、0.1L≦d≦0.4Lの関係を満足するのが好ましい。なお、非融着部Nの位置は、各交差位置に限るものではなく、上記関係を満たしておれば各交差位置以外の位置に非融着部Nが位置していてもよい。 The dimensions of the frame-like fused portion 41 can be appropriately determined, but the width 41w of the frame line is preferably about 1 to 5 mm, and the area inside the frame is preferably about 100 to 1000 mm 2 . In the case of having a lattice-like fusion pattern, it is preferable that the length (center distance) 41d between intersecting positions is about 10 to 40 mm, and the intersecting angle θ (inner side angle) is 60 to 120 degrees. Further, in the case of adopting the above-described grid pattern composed of dotted fused lines, when the length of the fused portion M in each fused line is L and the gap is d, 0.1 L ≦ d ≦ 0 It is preferable that the 4L relationship is satisfied. The position of the non-fused portion N is not limited to each intersection position, and the non-fused portion N may be located at a position other than each intersection position as long as the above relationship is satisfied.
 また、温度変化物質40は加熱により融着されるものであるため、温度変化物質40とともに加熱される部材がある場合には、前述の形態と同様に、温度変化物質40の融点が温度変化物質40とともに加熱される部材よりも低い物質であるのが望ましい。 Further, since the temperature change material 40 is fused by heating, when there is a member heated together with the temperature change material 40, the melting point of the temperature change material 40 is the temperature change material as in the above-described embodiment. It is desirable that the material be lower than the member heated with 40.
 また、温度変化物質40の融着対象部材が不織布や吸収体56のように繊維集合体である場合、温度変化物質40の溶融時の粘度が高過ぎると、繊維間隙に浸透し難くなり付着力が低下するおそれがあり、粘度が低過ぎると融着部分が枠状に連続し難くなる。この観点から、温度変化物質40としては、溶融時の温度(例えば70~130℃)における粘度が5~80ポアズのものが好ましい。 In addition, when the fusion target member of the temperature change material 40 is a fiber assembly such as a nonwoven fabric or an absorbent body 56, if the temperature change material 40 has a too high viscosity at the time of melting, it does not easily penetrate into the fiber gap and adheres. If the viscosity is too low, it becomes difficult for the fused portion to continue in a frame shape. From this viewpoint, the temperature changing substance 40 preferably has a viscosity of 5 to 80 poise at a melting temperature (for example, 70 to 130 ° C.).
 温度変化物質40を挟む表面側部材及び裏面側部材としては、図20(a)に示すように既存の部材を利用することが好ましく、包装シート58の他、吸収体56を用いることもできる。また、図示しないが、二層構造吸収体のように、表面側吸収体とその裏面側に重なる裏面側吸収体とを有する場合に、表面側部材は表面側吸収体とし、裏面側部材は裏面側吸収体としたりすることもできる。 As the front side member and the back side member that sandwich the temperature change substance 40, it is preferable to use an existing member as shown in FIG. 20A, and an absorbent body 56 can be used in addition to the packaging sheet 58. Moreover, although not shown in figure, when it has a surface side absorber and the back surface side absorber which overlaps the back surface side like a two-layer structure absorber, a surface side member is made into a surface side absorber, and a back surface side member is a back surface It can also be used as a side absorber.
 また、通常おむつに備えられている部材を利用せずに、表面側部材及び裏面側部材の少なくとも一方として専用の部材を備えることもできる。図20(b)は、この例を示しており、表面側部材及び裏面側部材としてそれぞれ専用の第1及び第2の液透過性シート45,46を設けているものである。この場合、図23(a)に示すように、表面側部材は、一枚の液透過性シート47を折り畳んで形成された層構造物における表面側層47aとし、裏面側部材は表面側層47aの裏面側に隣接配置された裏面側層47bとすることもできる。折り畳み回数は特に限定されず、図23(a)に示すように二つ折りとするほか、図23(b)に示すように三つ折り(断面がZ字状となる折り方)とすることもできる。後者の場合、シート47の中間層47bは、その上側の温度変化物質40に対しては裏面側部材となり、その下側の温度変化物質40に対しては表面側部材となる。液透過性シート45~47としては、前述した表面シート30やセカンドシート44と同様の素材や、包装シート58と同様の素材を用いることができる。 Further, without using a member normally provided in a diaper, a dedicated member can be provided as at least one of the front surface side member and the back surface side member. FIG. 20B shows this example, in which dedicated first and second liquid- permeable sheets 45 and 46 are provided as a front surface side member and a back surface side member, respectively. In this case, as shown in FIG. 23A, the front side member is a front side layer 47a in a layer structure formed by folding one liquid-permeable sheet 47, and the back side member is a front side layer 47a. It can also be set as the back surface side layer 47b adjacently arranged on the back surface side. The number of times of folding is not particularly limited, and it can be folded in two as shown in FIG. 23 (a), or can be folded in three (as shown in FIG. 23 (b)). . In the latter case, the intermediate layer 47b of the sheet 47 is a back side member for the upper temperature change substance 40 and a front side member for the lower temperature change substance 40. As the liquid permeable sheets 45 to 47, the same material as the above-described top sheet 30 and the second sheet 44 or the same material as the packaging sheet 58 can be used.
 温度変化物質40を枠状に融着させる場合、その融着部位はポケット部57内の全体とするのが好ましいが、一部とすることもでき、ポケット部57外に温度変化物質40を含有する場合にはその温度変化物質も周囲に隣接する部材に融着させることができる。 In the case where the temperature change material 40 is fused in a frame shape, the fusion site is preferably the entire inside of the pocket portion 57, but can also be a part, and the temperature change material 40 is contained outside the pocket portion 57. In this case, the temperature change substance can be fused to the adjacent member.
 表面側部材及び裏面側部材は、この温度変化物質40を設ける範囲以上であれば、その寸法は特に限定されないが、温度変化物質40を設ける範囲よりも大きい(周縁部全体が温度変化物質40を有する部分の周縁から食み出す)と、温度変化物質が表面側部材及び裏面側部材間から零れ落ち難くなるため、好ましい。 The dimensions of the front side member and the back side member are not particularly limited as long as the temperature change material 40 is within the range in which the temperature change material 40 is provided. It is preferable that the temperature change substance spills out from between the front surface side member and the back surface side member.
 温度変化物質40を表面側部材及び裏面側部材に枠状に融着させる方法としては、図24(a)に示すように、表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49間に粒子状(粉体状含む)の温度変化物質42を挟んだ状態の加工対象部材400を、格子状等の枠状部分を有するエンボスパターンで且つ温度変化物質42が溶融する温度でヒートエンボス加工を施す、具体的には同図に示すように、いずれか一方又は両方のロール340の表面に所定パターンの凹凸を形成しておき、枠状融着部分のみを加圧加熱するという方法(第1の手法)を提案する。これにより、融着部分41が形成されるのは、エンボスロール340の凸部パターンに対応する加圧加熱領域のみであり、これ以外の領域である枠内側部分は加圧加熱されず、温度変化物質42の融着は起こらない。この第1の方法は、適宜パターンのヒートエンボス加工のみで枠状融着部分41を形成できるため好ましい。 As a method for fusing the temperature change substance 40 to the front surface side member and the back surface side member in a frame shape, as shown in FIG. The object 400 to be processed with the temperature change material 42 sandwiched between the embossing pattern having a frame-like portion such as a lattice and a temperature at which the temperature change material 42 is melted. As shown in the figure, a method (first method) is proposed in which irregularities of a predetermined pattern are formed on the surface of one or both of the rolls 340 and only the frame-like fused portion is heated under pressure. . As a result, the fused portion 41 is formed only in the pressure heating region corresponding to the convex pattern of the embossing roll 340, and the other portion inside the frame is not pressurized and heated, and the temperature change Fusion of the substance 42 does not occur. This first method is preferable because the frame-like fused portion 41 can be formed only by heat embossing of an appropriate pattern.
 第2の方法としては、図13(b)に示すように、吸収性物品の技術分野で用いられているホットメルト接着剤の塗布に倣って、表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49のいずれか一方における対向面上に、温度変化物質の溶融液41をノズルやロール転写等を用いて枠状に塗布するとともに、その少なくとも枠41の内側に粒子状の温度変化物質42を配置した後、その上に他方の部材を重ね、溶融液41を接着剤としてその冷却固化により表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49を接着する方法が提案される。この第2の方法も、吸収性物品の製造ラインに組み込むのは容易であり、好ましい形態である。 As the second method, as shown in FIG. 13B, either one of the front-side member 48 and the back-side member 49 is applied in accordance with the application of the hot-melt adhesive used in the technical field of absorbent articles. On the opposite surface, a temperature change substance melt 41 is applied in a frame shape using a nozzle, roll transfer, or the like, and at least the particulate temperature change substance 42 is disposed inside the frame 41, A method is proposed in which the other member is stacked on top, and the front side member 48 and the rear side member 49 are adhered by cooling and solidifying the melt 41 as an adhesive. This second method is also a preferred form because it is easy to incorporate into the production line for absorbent articles.
 また、第3の方法として、図13(c)に示すように、上述の第1の方法と第2の方法とを組み合わせることも提案される。すなわち、表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49のいずれか一方における対向面上に、温度変化物質の溶融液41を第1の方向に間隔を空けた複数位置において、第1の方向と交差する第2の方向に沿って線状に塗布するとともに、その少なくとも塗布線41間に粒子状の温度変化物質42を配置した後、その上に他方の部材を重ね、溶融液41を接着剤として表面側部48材及び裏面側部材49を接着し、しかる後、温度変化物質42が溶融する温度で、第2の方向に間隔を空けて第1の方向に沿う線状のヒートエンボス加工を施す方法である。この第3の方法を、吸収性物品の製造ラインに組み込む場合、第1の方向をラインCD方向とし、第2の方向をMD方向とするのが好ましい。 Also, as the third method, as shown in FIG. 13C, it is also proposed to combine the first method and the second method described above. That is, on the opposing surface of either the front surface side member 48 or the back surface side member 49, the melt 41 of the temperature change material 41 intersects the first direction at a plurality of positions spaced in the first direction. 2 is applied linearly along the direction of 2 and a particulate temperature change substance 42 is disposed at least between the application lines 41, and the other member is stacked on the surface, and the melt 41 is used as an adhesive on the surface side. The material 48 and the back side member 49 are bonded together, and then, at a temperature at which the temperature change substance 42 is melted, a linear heat embossing process is performed along the first direction with an interval in the second direction. is there. When this third method is incorporated into a manufacturing line for absorbent articles, it is preferable that the first direction is the line CD direction and the second direction is the MD direction.
 さらに、これら第1~第3の方法とは発想が全く異なる第4の方法として、図13(d)に示すように、表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49の間に、相対的に融点が低い粒子状の低融点温度変化物質42bを枠状に配置するとともに、その枠の内側に相対的に融点が粒子状の高い高融点温度変化物質42aを配置した状態で、低融点温度変化物質42bが溶融し且つ高融点温度変化物質42aが溶融しないように加熱する方法も提案される。この第4の手法によると、パターン加熱やパターン塗布が不要となる(パターン加熱等を行っても良い)。 Furthermore, as a fourth method that is completely different from the first to third methods, as shown in FIG. 13D, a melting point is relatively between the front surface side member 48 and the back surface side member 49. The low-melting-point temperature-changing substance 42b is arranged in a state where the low-particulate low-melting-point temperature-changing substance 42b is arranged in a frame and the high-melting-point temperature-changing substance 42a having a relatively high melting point is arranged inside the frame. A method of heating so that the high melting point temperature change substance 42a does not melt is proposed. According to the fourth method, pattern heating and pattern application are not required (pattern heating or the like may be performed).
 第4の手法における加熱手段は特に限定されないが、例えば前述の図16に示すエアスルードライヤー、図17(a)及び(b)に示す加熱手段、図18に示す加熱手段、及び図19(a)に示す加熱手段を用いることができる。 The heating means in the fourth method is not particularly limited. For example, the air-through dryer shown in FIG. 16, the heating means shown in FIGS. 17 (a) and (b), the heating means shown in FIG. 18, and FIG. 19 (a). The heating means shown in FIG.
 第4の手法における温度変化物質40の加熱溶融は、表面側部材及び裏面側部材を他の部材に取り付ける工程のみならず、その後の製造過程の適宜段階、例えば内装体200の組立完了状態(製品状態までの組立完了前)、又は製品状態までの組立完了後に、内装体200やおむつ全体に対して行うこともできる。この場合における加熱方法としては、例えば前述した図16~図19に示す加熱手段を応用することができる。 The heating and melting of the temperature change material 40 in the fourth method is not limited to the process of attaching the front side member and the back side member to other members, but at an appropriate stage in the subsequent manufacturing process, for example, the assembly completion state of the interior body 200 (product It can also be performed on the interior body 200 and the entire diaper after assembly to the state) or after assembly to the product state. As a heating method in this case, for example, the heating means shown in FIGS. 16 to 19 described above can be applied.
 上述の第1~第4の手法により形成された融着部分は、温度変化物質40の量や加熱時間等の条件にもよるが、表面側部材及び裏面側部材に対して溶融した複数の温度変化物質が一体化した塊状又は膜状の温度変化物質40が枠状に付着した状態となる。そして、融着された温度変化物質40は、一度融解して液状化した後固化するため、表面積が小さくなっている。従って、温度変化物質40における尿との接触面積が小さくなるため、温度変化速度が抑えられ、持続性が向上する。ここで、温度変化物質40として嵩密度が低い粒子状物を用いるのは好ましい形態である。そうすると、速効性と遅効性の効果の違いをよりはっきりさせることができる。粒子状の温度変化物質40は、同程度の粒径であれば、嵩密度が低いほど表面積が大きく、尿との接触効率が高いため、温度変化速度が速くなる。特に温度変化物質40が尿に溶解して温度変化が生じる場合にはこの傾向が顕著である。 The fusion part formed by the above-described first to fourth methods depends on conditions such as the amount of the temperature change substance 40 and the heating time, but a plurality of temperatures melted with respect to the front side member and the back side member. The bulk or film-like temperature change substance 40 in which the change substances are integrated is attached in a frame shape. The fused temperature change material 40 is melted once, liquefied, and then solidified, so that the surface area is small. Therefore, since the contact area with the urine in the temperature change substance 40 becomes small, the temperature change speed is suppressed and the sustainability is improved. Here, it is a preferable form to use a particulate matter having a low bulk density as the temperature change substance 40. Then, the difference between the fast-acting effect and the slow-acting effect can be made clearer. If the particle-like temperature change substance 40 has the same particle size, the lower the bulk density, the larger the surface area and the higher the contact efficiency with urine, and thus the temperature change speed becomes faster. This tendency is particularly remarkable when the temperature change substance 40 is dissolved in urine to cause a temperature change.
 嵩密度の低い粒子状の温度変化物質40は前述の形態と同様のものを用いることができ、融着部分の嵩密度はこれらよりも高ければ良い。 As the particulate temperature change material 40 having a low bulk density, the same material as that described above can be used, and the bulk density of the fused portion should be higher than these.
 他方、製造ラインによる連続製造を行う場合、資材は連続帯状で供給し、枠状融着部分の融着後にMD方向に所定の間隔で所定寸法に切断するのが好ましい。しかし、この場合、製品の製造工程や、販売先への輸送過程、使用者による使用過程等において、切断端部から温度変化物質が零れ落ちるおそれがある。そこで、図25(a)に示すように、それぞれ連続帯状をなす表面側部材及び裏面側部材を所定方向に搬送しながら、上述の第1~第4の方法を行った後、温度変化物質の枠状融着部分41を形成した表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49を、MD方向に所定の間隔を空けて切断するのと同時に、その切断端部(切断位置に対して流れ方向上流側及び下流側の両方)にCD方向に沿う線状のヒートエンボス加工を施すのは好ましい。図中の符号41Eが、このエンボス加工部を示している。この場合、切断位置から、隣接するCD方向に沿う線状の温度変化物質の融着部分41までの間隔が狭くなるため、零れ落ちる粒子状温度変化物質42の量を低減することができる。特にこのヒートエンボス41Eにより上述の第1の方法と同様にCD方向に沿う線状の温度変化物質の融着部分を形成するのが好ましいが、表面側部材48と裏面側部材49とがある程度の強さで接着されるだけでも良い。 On the other hand, in the case of continuous production using a production line, it is preferable that the material is supplied in a continuous band shape and is cut into a predetermined dimension at predetermined intervals in the MD direction after the frame-shaped fusion part is fused. However, in this case, there is a possibility that the temperature change substance may spill from the cut end in the manufacturing process of the product, the transportation process to the sales destination, the usage process by the user, and the like. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 25 (a), after carrying out the first to fourth methods described above while conveying the front side member and the back side member each having a continuous belt shape in a predetermined direction, The front side member 48 and the back side member 49 on which the frame-shaped fusion part 41 is formed are cut at a predetermined interval in the MD direction, and at the same time, the cut end portion (the upstream side in the flow direction and the cut position). It is preferable to perform linear heat embossing along the CD direction on both the downstream side). Reference numeral 41E in the drawing indicates this embossed portion. In this case, since the interval from the cutting position to the fused portion 41 of the linear temperature change material along the adjacent CD direction is narrowed, the amount of the particulate temperature change material 42 falling down can be reduced. In particular, it is preferable that the heat emboss 41E forms a fused portion of a linear temperature change material along the CD direction as in the first method described above. However, the surface side member 48 and the back side member 49 have a certain degree of extent. It may be simply bonded with strength.
 また、上述の第1~第4の方法を行うことにより、MD方向に間隔を空けてCD方向に沿う線状の温度変化物質の融着部分41を形成する場合には、図25(b)に示すように、切断予定位置CTのMD方向一方側及び他方側にそれぞれ隣接するCD方向に沿う線状の温度変化物質の融着部分間の間隔Dcを他の部分の間隔Doより狭くするのも好ましい。この場合も、切断位置から、隣接するCD方向に沿う線状の温度変化物質の融着部分41までの間隔が狭くなるため、零れ落ちる粒子状温度変化物質42の量を低減することができる。 Further, in the case where the fused portion 41 of the linear temperature change material along the CD direction is formed at intervals in the MD direction by performing the above first to fourth methods, FIG. 25 (b) As shown in FIG. 4, the interval Dc between the fused portions of the linear temperature change material along the CD direction adjacent to the MD direction one side and the other side of the planned cutting position CT is made smaller than the interval Do of the other portions. Is also preferable. Also in this case, since the interval from the cutting position to the fused portion 41 of the linear temperature change material along the adjacent CD direction is narrowed, the amount of the particulate temperature change material 42 falling down can be reduced.
 これらの方法における切断は、他の部材への取り付けに先立って予め行う他、表面側部材及び裏面側部材の種類によっては、個々の製品への切断により行うこともできる。 Cutting in these methods is performed in advance prior to attachment to other members, and depending on the type of the front side member and the back side member, it can also be performed by cutting into individual products.
 他方、温度変化物質40の移動を防止するために、前述のとおり吸収性物品内部の適宜の部材に温度変化物質を融着すると、温度変化物質の表面積の低下により水分との接触効率が低下し、温度変化効率が低下するおそれもある。そこで、ポケット部57内に設けられる温度変化物質として、図26(a)に示すように、粒子状の温度変化物質40を圧縮成形して得られる成形片40Tを用いることも提案される。成形片40Tは一つでもよいが、大きすぎると着用者に異物感をもたらすため、複数あるいは多数の小片として存在するのが好ましい。これらの温度変化物質の成形片40Tは、隣接部材に対して接着等されておらず、移動可能な状態で封じ込められているが、包装シート58の繊維間隙及び吸収体56の繊維間隙よりも大きく、かつこれら部材間に挟まれているため、表面に沿う方向及び厚み方向のいずれにも殆ど移動できない。しかも、温度変化物質の成形片40Tは、多孔質構造であるため、温度変化物質粒子の単なる溶融固化物と比べて表面積、すなわち水分との接触面積が格段に大きいため、温度変化効率が殆ど低下しないか又は低下するとしても少なくて済む。よって、温度変化物質40の移動が抑制されるとともに、温度変化物質と水分との接触効率も低下し難いため、所期の温度変化が発生し易い。 On the other hand, in order to prevent the movement of the temperature change substance 40, as described above, when the temperature change substance is fused to an appropriate member inside the absorbent article, the contact efficiency with moisture decreases due to the decrease in the surface area of the temperature change substance. In addition, the temperature change efficiency may be reduced. Accordingly, it is also proposed to use a molded piece 40T obtained by compression molding the particulate temperature change material 40 as shown in FIG. Although there may be only one molded piece 40T, it is preferable that the molded piece 40T is present as a plurality or a plurality of small pieces because it causes the wearer to feel a foreign object when it is too large. The molded pieces 40T of these temperature change substances are not bonded to adjacent members and are contained in a movable state, but are larger than the fiber gap of the packaging sheet 58 and the fiber gap of the absorbent body 56. And since it is pinched | interposed between these members, it can hardly move to any of the direction and thickness direction along a surface. In addition, since the temperature change substance shaped piece 40T has a porous structure, the surface area, that is, the contact area with moisture is much larger than that of a simple melt-solidified substance of the temperature change substance particles, so that the temperature change efficiency is almost reduced. Less or less if not. Therefore, the movement of the temperature change substance 40 is suppressed, and the contact efficiency between the temperature change substance and moisture is not easily lowered, so that an expected temperature change is likely to occur.
 温度変化物質の成形片40Tを挟む表面側部材及び裏面側部材としては、図26(a)に示すように既存の部材を利用することが好ましく、包装シート58の他、吸収体56を用いることもできる。また、図示しないが、二層構造吸収体のように、表面側吸収体とその裏面側に重なる裏面側吸収体とを有する場合に、表面側部材は表面側吸収体とし、裏面側部材は裏面側吸収体としたりすることもできる。 As the front surface side member and the back surface side member sandwiching the molded piece 40T of the temperature change substance, it is preferable to use existing members as shown in FIG. 26 (a), and the absorbent body 56 is used in addition to the packaging sheet 58. You can also. Moreover, although not shown in figure, when it has a surface side absorber and the back surface side absorber which overlaps the back surface side like a two-layer structure absorber, a surface side member is made into a surface side absorber, and a back surface side member is a back surface It can also be used as a side absorber.
 また、通常おむつに備えられている部材を利用せずに、表面側部材及び裏面側部材の少なくとも一方として専用の部材を備えることもできる。図26(b)は、この例を示しており、表面側部材及び裏面側部材としてそれぞれ専用の第1及び第2の液透過性シート45,46を設けているものである。この場合、図27(a)に示すように、表面側部材は、一枚の液透過性シート47を折り畳んで形成された層構造物における表面側層47aとし、裏面側部材は表面側層47aの裏面側に隣接配置された裏面側層47bとすることもできる。折り畳み回数は特に限定されず、図27(a)に示すように二つ折りとするほか、図27(b)に示すように三つ折り(断面がZ字状となる折り方)とすることもできる。後者の場合、シート47の中間層47bは、その上側の温度変化物質の成形片40Tに対しては裏面側部材となり、その下側の温度変化物質の成形片40Tに対しては表面側部材となる。液透過性シート45~47としては、前述した表面シート30やセカンドシート44と同様の素材や、包装シート58と同様の素材を用いることができる。また、シートの端部を折り返し、前述の包装シート58のように重なり部を有するように包むと、端部からの温度変化物質40の零れ落ちを防止することができるため、好ましい。 Further, without using a member normally provided in a diaper, a dedicated member can be provided as at least one of the front surface side member and the back surface side member. FIG. 26B shows this example, in which dedicated first and second liquid- permeable sheets 45 and 46 are provided as a front surface side member and a back surface side member, respectively. In this case, as shown in FIG. 27A, the front side member is a front side layer 47a in a layer structure formed by folding one liquid-permeable sheet 47, and the back side member is a front side layer 47a. It can also be set as the back surface side layer 47b adjacently arranged on the back surface side. The number of times of folding is not particularly limited, and it can be folded in half as shown in FIG. 27 (a), or can be folded in three (as shown in FIG. 27 (b)). . In the latter case, the intermediate layer 47b of the sheet 47 serves as a back surface side member for the upper temperature change substance molding piece 40T, and serves as a front surface side member for the lower temperature change substance molding piece 40T. Become. As the liquid permeable sheets 45 to 47, the same material as the above-described top sheet 30 and the second sheet 44 or the same material as the packaging sheet 58 can be used. Moreover, it is preferable that the end portion of the sheet is folded and wrapped so as to have an overlapping portion as in the above-described packaging sheet 58 because the temperature change substance 40 can be prevented from falling off from the end portion.
 温度変化物質の成形片40Tは、前述の温度変化物質40のみから形成されてもよいが、50%以下程度であればそれ以外の物質を混合して成形されたものであってもよい。例えば、高吸収性ポリマー粒子を混合すると、温度変化物質40により冷却または加熱された尿が高吸収性ポリマーによりその場で吸収されて物品表面側に止まるため、装着者に温度変化を効果的に伝達することができる。冷却または加熱された尿を保水させるために、パルプや親水性合成繊維等の親水性繊維を混合してもよい。 The molded piece 40T of the temperature change substance may be formed only from the temperature change substance 40 described above, but may be formed by mixing other substances as long as it is about 50% or less. For example, when the superabsorbent polymer particles are mixed, urine cooled or heated by the temperature change substance 40 is absorbed on the spot by the superabsorbent polymer and stops on the surface of the article. Can communicate. In order to retain the cooled or heated urine, hydrophilic fibers such as pulp and hydrophilic synthetic fibers may be mixed.
 温度変化物質の成形片40Tを設ける範囲(おむつ表面方向に沿う範囲)は、ポケット部57内の全体とするのが好ましいが、一部とすることもでき、ポケット部57外に温度変化物質40を含有する場合にはその温度変化物質40も成形片40Tの形態で設けることができる。 The range (the range along the diaper surface direction) in which the temperature change substance molding piece 40 </ b> T is provided is preferably the entire inside of the pocket portion 57, but can also be a part of the temperature change substance 40 outside the pocket portion 57. In the case where the temperature change substance 40 is contained, the temperature change substance 40 can also be provided in the form of a molded piece 40T.
 表面側部材及び裏面側部材は、この温度変化物質の成形片40Tを設ける範囲以上であれば、その寸法は特に限定されないが、温度変化物質の成形片40Tを設ける範囲よりも大きい(周縁部全体が温度変化物質の成形片40Tを有する部分の周縁から食み出す)と、温度変化物質が表面側部材及び裏面側部材間から零れ落ち難くなるため、好ましい。 The front side member and the back side member are not particularly limited as long as the temperature change material molding piece 40T is within the range in which the temperature change substance molding piece 40T is provided. , And the temperature change material is less likely to spill from between the front surface side member and the back surface side member.
 一般に、粒子を圧縮して粒子間の空隙をうめていくと、圧縮力が高くなり粒子間で支持されているブリッジが崩され空隙が埋められ粒子自身が変形していき、さらには粒子の一部が破壊され新しく形成された微粒子が空隙を埋め、粒子の可塑変形により粒子間が強く密着するとともに、粒子の接点では粒子間の滑り摩擦に伴う発熱によって表面が溶融して粒子間が結合し、圧縮力をとり除いても形状がくずれない塊となる。温度変化物質の圧縮成形片40Tはこのような原理を利用して形成されるものである。なお、粒子が成形し難い材質の場合には粘結剤(結合剤)を用いることができる。ソルビトールやキシリトール等の糖アルコールは、粒子が成形しやすいという点でも好適な温度変化物質である。 In general, when the particles are compressed to fill the voids between the particles, the compressive force increases, the bridge supported between the particles collapses, the voids are filled, and the particles themselves are deformed. The part is destroyed and the newly formed fine particles fill the voids, and the particles are strongly adhered due to plastic deformation of the particles, and at the contact point of the particles, the surface melts due to the heat generated by sliding friction between the particles, and the particles are bonded. Even if the compressive force is removed, the shape does not collapse. The compression-molded piece 40T of the temperature change material is formed using such a principle. In the case where the particles are difficult to mold, a binder (binder) can be used. Sugar alcohols such as sorbitol and xylitol are suitable temperature-change substances in that the particles are easy to mold.
 成形片40Tの圧縮の程度は原料粒子の粒径や密度等に応じて適宜定めることができる。原料粒子としては、顆粒、表面凹凸の多い形状の粒子、表面や内部に微細な孔を有する粒子等のように嵩密度の低い多孔質粒子が好適である。原料粒子の嵩密度の程度は適宜定めれば良いが、真密度の50%以下である(見かけの体積に対して50%以上の空隙(空間)を有する)のが好ましい。例えば、ソルビトールの場合、真密度は1.50g/cm3なので、好ましい嵩密度は0.75g/cm3以下であり、0.50~0.70g/cm3がより好ましく、0.55~0.65g/cm3が特に好ましい。また、粒子径が大きいと、見かけの嵩密度は小さいが、表面積は大きくないため、粒子状の温度変化物質40を用いる場合、その平均粒径(JIS K 1474-2007 メジアン径)が200~600μmであることが好ましい。成形片40Tの嵩密度はこれらよりも高ければ良く、具体的には真密度の50~80%程度、特に55~70%程度まで圧縮したものが好ましい。平均粒径が200~600μm且つ嵩密度が0.50~0.70g/cm3程度の糖アルコール粒子を用いる場合、成形片40Tの嵩密度が0.75~1.10g/cm3程度、特に0.80~1.00g/cm3程度となるように圧縮成形するのが好ましい。 The degree of compression of the molded piece 40T can be appropriately determined according to the particle size, density, etc. of the raw material particles. As the raw material particles, porous particles having a low bulk density such as granules, particles having a lot of surface irregularities, and particles having fine pores on the surface or inside are suitable. The degree of bulk density of the raw material particles may be determined as appropriate, but it is preferably 50% or less of the true density (having 50% or more voids (space) with respect to the apparent volume). For example, in the case of sorbitol, the true density is so 1.50 g / cm 3, preferably bulk density is 0.75 g / cm 3 or less, more preferably 0.50 ~ 0.70g / cm 3, 0.55 ~ 0 .65 g / cm 3 is particularly preferred. In addition, when the particle size is large, the apparent bulk density is small, but the surface area is not large. Therefore, when the particulate temperature change material 40 is used, the average particle size (JIS K 1474-2007 median diameter) is 200 to 600 μm. It is preferable that The bulk density of the molded piece 40T only needs to be higher than these, and specifically, a compact compressed to about 50 to 80%, particularly about 55 to 70% of the true density is preferable. When sugar alcohol particles having an average particle diameter of 200 to 600 μm and a bulk density of about 0.50 to 0.70 g / cm 3 are used, the bulk density of the molded piece 40T is about 0.75 to 1.10 g / cm 3 , particularly It is preferable to perform compression molding so as to be about 0.80 to 1.00 g / cm 3 .
 成形片40Tの寸法は適宜定めることができるが、細か過ぎると移動し易くなり、大き過ぎると異物感をもたらすため、厚みが0.5~2.0mm且つ面積が50~1000mm2の扁平片であるのが好ましい。また、圧縮成形の過程で残留する粒子状分の重量や、形成された成形片40Tがその後のおむつ製造工程における折り曲げ等により分割化あるいは細分化して物品内に存在する面積50mm2以下の細片の重量は、前述の温度変化物質の全使用量に対して50%以下であることが好ましく、30%以下であることがより好ましい。(すなわち、全温度変化物質の重量に対する、厚みが0.5~2.0mm且つ面積が50~1000mm2である成形片40Tの重量比は、50%以上、特に70%以上であることが好ましい。) The size of the molded piece 40T can be determined as appropriate, but if it is too fine, it will move easily, and if it is too large, it will give a foreign object feeling. Therefore, a flat piece having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 is used. Preferably there is. Further, the weight of the particulate matter remaining in the compression molding process, or the formed piece 40T is divided or subdivided by bending or the like in the subsequent diaper manufacturing process, and the strip having an area of 50 mm 2 or less existing in the article The weight of is preferably 50% or less, more preferably 30% or less, based on the total amount of the temperature-changing substance used. (That is, the weight ratio of the molded piece 40T having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 with respect to the weight of the total temperature change material is preferably 50% or more, particularly preferably 70% or more. .)
 他方、このような成形片40Tを有する吸収性物品は、例えば打錠(タブレッテイング)等の圧縮成形により温度変化物質の成形片40Tを予め製造しておき、これを物品の組み立てに際して適宜の段階で部材間に挟んでも良いが、吸収性物品の製造設備としては、タブレットのようなある程度大きさのあるものを混入させる技術が汎用されていないため、製造設備の新規開発が必要となる等の問題がある。このため、本発明では、既存技術の利用又は応用により温度変化物質の成形片を所定の部材間に混入させる技術についても提案する。すなわち、図28に示すように、粒子状の温度変化物質40pを所定の表面側部材48及び裏面側部材49間に挟んだ状態で、一対のロール340,341で圧縮することにより、粒子状の温度変化物質40pの一部又は全部を圧縮し、成形片40Tとして形成する工程を含むものである。これらの製造形態からも判るように、製品内に含まれる全ての温度変化物質が成形片40Tであっても、また、一部の温度変化物質40pが粒子状のまま、又は一旦成形された後に崩れる等により粒子状40pとなっていてもよい。 On the other hand, in the absorbent article having such a molded piece 40T, for example, a molded piece 40T of a temperature change substance is produced in advance by compression molding such as tableting, and this is performed at an appropriate stage when assembling the article. However, as a manufacturing facility for absorbent articles, a technology for mixing a certain amount of size such as a tablet is not widely used, so a new development of the manufacturing facility is required. There's a problem. For this reason, the present invention also proposes a technique for mixing a shaped piece of a temperature change substance between predetermined members by using or applying an existing technique. That is, as shown in FIG. 28, the particulate temperature change substance 40p is compressed by a pair of rolls 340 and 341 in a state where the particulate temperature change substance 40p is sandwiched between the predetermined front surface side member 48 and the back surface side member 49. This includes a step of compressing a part or the whole of the temperature change substance 40p to form the molded piece 40T. As can be seen from these production forms, even if all the temperature change substances contained in the product are the molded pieces 40T, or some of the temperature change substances 40p remain in the particulate form or after being once molded. It may be particulate 40p due to collapse or the like.
 圧縮成形に用いる一対のロール340,341としては、両ロール340,341ともに表面に凹凸の無い平滑ロールを用いることも、またいずれか一方又は両方の表面に所定パターンの凹凸を有するエンボスロールを用いることもできる。前者の場合でも粒子状の温度変化物質全体40pが一度に圧縮されないため、全体が一つの大きな成形片となるのではなく、図28(b)に示すように、全体に多数のひび割れが入り、多数の小片40Tが形成される。後者の場合は、エンボスパターンにより規則的な形状の多数の小片40Tを形成することができる。また、面積50~1000mm2の小片が50%以上となっていることが好ましい。 As a pair of rolls 340 and 341 used for compression molding, both rolls 340 and 341 may be smooth rolls having no irregularities on their surfaces, or embossing rolls having irregularities of a predetermined pattern on either or both surfaces. You can also Even in the former case, since the entire particulate temperature change substance 40p is not compressed at a time, the whole does not become one large molded piece, but as shown in FIG. A large number of small pieces 40T are formed. In the latter case, a large number of small pieces 40T having a regular shape can be formed by the emboss pattern. Further, it is preferable that a small piece having an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 is 50% or more.
 図10(b)及び図27に示すように、表面側部材及び裏面側部材がシートである場合には、これらのシートを他の部材に組み付ける前に、前述の圧縮成形工程を行うことにより容易に製品を製造することができる。なお、温度変化物質の粒子状物をシート間に配置して圧縮する場合、配置から圧縮の間に粒子状物がシート間を移動して偏りや零れが生じることがある。このような問題はシートを表面毛羽立ちの多いものや嵩高なものとすることによりある程度解決できるが、温度変化物質の粒子状物にパルプや合成繊維等の繊維状物を一定量混合することで、圧縮前の粒子状物の移動を防止してもよい。この場合の繊維状物の混合比率は50%以下が適当であり、10~30%程度が好ましい。ソルビトールやキシリトール等の糖アルコールは、粒子が成形しやすいため、圧縮成形されにくい材料を混合しても成形することができ、温度変化物質の配合量が50%以上であれば、30%程度までの高吸収性ポリマー粒子を混合することもできる。 As shown in FIG. 10B and FIG. 27, when the front side member and the back side member are sheets, it is easy to perform the above-described compression molding process before assembling these sheets to other members. The product can be manufactured. In addition, when arrange | positioning and compressing the particulate matter of a temperature change substance between sheets, a particulate matter may move between sheets between arrangement | positioning and compression, and deviation and spill may arise. Such a problem can be solved to some extent by making the sheet fluffy or bulky, but by mixing a certain amount of fiber such as pulp or synthetic fiber with particulate matter of temperature change material, You may prevent the movement of the particulate matter before compression. In this case, the mixing ratio of the fibrous material is suitably 50% or less, preferably about 10 to 30%. Since sugar alcohols such as sorbitol and xylitol are easy to form particles, they can be formed even by mixing materials that are difficult to be compression-molded. The superabsorbent polymer particles can also be mixed.
 また、表面側部材及び裏面側部材のいずれか一方として吸収体を用いる場合、特に同図の例のように表面側部材が包装シート58であり裏面側部材が吸収体56である場合には、吸収体56の表面若しくは裏面、又は2層構造の吸収体の間に粒子状の温度変化物質を散布し、次いでこれら吸収体56及び温度変化物質を包装シート58により包んで包装吸収体を形成し、しかる後、この包装吸収体を一対のロールで圧縮することにより容易に製品を製造することができる。前述したとおり、吸収性物品の一般的な製造方法では、包装シート58で包装した後の吸収体56に対して包装シート58の固定等を目的として一対のロールにより加圧を行うため、その加圧を利用して圧縮成形することにより加圧条件の変更のみでこのような製造手法を採用することができ、既存設備への適用が極めて容易である。また、粒子状の温度変化物質の散布方法や吸収体56の形成方法を調節することにより、成形片40T中に高吸収性ポリマーや繊維状物を適宜混合することも容易である。 Further, when using an absorber as either one of the front side member and the back side member, particularly when the front side member is the packaging sheet 58 and the back side member is the absorber 56 as in the example of FIG. A particulate temperature change material is sprayed between the front surface or the back surface of the absorber 56 or an absorber having a two-layer structure, and then the absorber 56 and the temperature change material are wrapped by a packaging sheet 58 to form a package absorber. Then, the product can be easily manufactured by compressing the package absorbent body with a pair of rolls. As described above, in a general manufacturing method of an absorbent article, the absorbent body 56 after being wrapped with the packaging sheet 58 is pressurized with a pair of rolls for the purpose of fixing the packaging sheet 58 and the like. Such a manufacturing method can be adopted only by changing the pressurizing condition by compression molding using pressure, and it is very easy to apply to existing facilities. In addition, it is easy to appropriately mix the superabsorbent polymer and the fibrous material in the molded piece 40T by adjusting the method of spraying the particulate temperature change material and the method of forming the absorber 56.
 本発明は、パンツ型やテープ式、あるいはパッド型の吸収性物品等、広範な用途に適用できるものである。特に、トレーニング用の使い捨ておむつ以外においても、排泄物の冷却による細菌繁殖の抑制や臭気抑制、冷え防止等の目的で利用することができる。 The present invention can be applied to a wide range of uses such as pants-type, tape-type, or pad-type absorbent articles. In particular, in addition to the disposable diaper for training, it can be used for the purpose of suppressing bacterial growth, odor suppression, cooling prevention, etc. by cooling the excrement.
パンツ型使い捨ておむつの内面を示す、おむつを展開した状態における平面図である。It is a top view in the state where the diaper was developed showing the inside of a pants type disposable diaper. パンツ型使い捨ておむつの外面を示す、おむつを展開した状態における平面図である。It is a top view in the state where the diaper was developed showing the outer surface of a pants type disposable diaper. 図1の6-6断面図である。FIG. 6 is a sectional view taken along line 6-6 in FIG. 図1の7-7断面図である。FIG. 7 is a sectional view taken along line 7-7 in FIG. 図1の8-8断面図である。FIG. 8 is a sectional view taken along the line 8-8 in FIG. パンツ型使い捨ておむつの要部のみを寸法とともに示す、おむつを展開した状態における平面図である。It is a top view in the state where a diaper was developed showing only a principal part of a pants type disposable diaper with a size. パンツ型使い捨ておむつの要部のみを寸法とともに示す、断面図である。It is sectional drawing which shows only the principal part of an underpants type disposable diaper with a dimension. 製品状態の正面図である。It is a front view of a product state. 製品状態の背面図である。It is a rear view of a product state. 他の吸収体例の平面図である。It is a top view of other absorber examples. 別の吸収体例の平面図である。It is a top view of another absorber example. 実験結果のグラフである。It is a graph of an experimental result. 図3に示される部分に相当する比較例の断面図である。It is sectional drawing of the comparative example corresponded to the part shown by FIG. 他の形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of another form. 他の形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of another form. 加熱手段を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows a heating means. 加熱手段を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows a heating means. 加熱手段を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows a heating means. 加熱手段を示す概略図である。It is the schematic which shows a heating means. 他の形態の要部断面図である。It is principal part sectional drawing of another form. 他の形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of another form. 他の形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of another form. 他の形態の要部断面図である。It is principal part sectional drawing of another form. 各種製造形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of various manufacture forms. 他の製造形態の要部平面図である。It is a principal part top view of another manufacturing form. 他の形態の要部断面図である。It is principal part sectional drawing of another form. 他の形態の要部断面図である。It is principal part sectional drawing of another form. (a)製造工程の概略図、(b)成形片の概略平面図である。(A) Schematic of manufacturing process, (b) Schematic plan view of molded piece.
符号の説明Explanation of symbols
 100…胴回り部、11…液不透過性シート、12F…腹側外装シート、12B…背側外装シート、200…内装体、30…表面シート、40…温度変化物質、50…吸収要素、52…繊維、54…高吸収性ポリマー粒子、56…吸収体、57…ポケット部、58…包装シート、60…側部バリヤーカフス、62…バリヤーシート、70…背側伸縮シート。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 100 ... Girth part, 11 ... Liquid impervious sheet, 12F ... Abdominal exterior sheet, 12B ... Back side exterior sheet, 200 ... Interior body, 30 ... Surface sheet, 40 ... Temperature change substance, 50 ... Absorbing element, 52 ... Fibers 54... Superabsorbent polymer particles 56. Absorber 57. Pocket portion 58. Packaging sheet 60. Side barrier cuff 62. Barrier sheet 70.

Claims (19)

  1.  物品前後方向中央より前側に延在する前側部分と、物品前後方向中央より後側に延在する後側部分とを有し、
     液透過性表面シートと裏面側シートとの間に吸収体が介在されてなる吸収部分を備えた、使い捨て吸収性物品において、
     前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%延在しており、
     前記吸収体に、厚みがその周囲の領域の0~50%であるポケット部が、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の20%の部位を含み、且つ前記ポケット部の前端部と前記吸収体の前端部との距離が物品全長の5~30%であるように、形成されており、
     前記ポケット部内に、尿との接触により尿を冷却又は加熱する温度変化物質が配置されている、
     ことを特徴とする使い捨て吸収性物品。
    It has a front side portion that extends to the front side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and a rear side portion that extends to the rear side from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article,
    In a disposable absorbent article comprising an absorbent portion in which an absorber is interposed between a liquid-permeable top sheet and a back sheet,
    The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side.
    The absorbent body has a pocket portion having a thickness of 0 to 50% of the surrounding area including a portion of 20% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article, and the front end of the pocket portion and the absorbent body Formed so that the distance from the front end of the product is 5 to 30% of the total length of the article,
    In the pocket portion, a temperature change substance that cools or heats urine by contact with urine is disposed,
    A disposable absorbent article characterized by that.
  2.  前記温度変化物質は尿への溶解により吸熱反応を起し、尿を冷却するものであり、且つ温度20℃の100mlの水への溶解度が30g以上であり、
     前記ポケット部内における前記温度変化物質の目付けが500~1000g/m2であり、
     前記ポケット部の総面積は2500~8000mm2であり、
     前記温度変化物質により前記吸収体に生じうる熱量変化の総量は20cal以上であり、
     前記温度変化物質を有する部分の単位面積当たりの熱量変化は1cal/cm2以上である、
     請求項1記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
    The temperature-changing substance causes endothermic reaction when dissolved in urine, cools urine, and has a solubility in 100 ml of water at a temperature of 20 ° C. of 30 g or more,
    The basis weight of the temperature change substance in the pocket is 500 to 1000 g / m 2 ;
    The total area of the pocket portion is 2500 to 8000 mm 2 .
    The total amount of heat change that can occur in the absorber due to the temperature change material is 20 cal or more,
    The calorie change per unit area of the portion having the temperature change substance is 1 cal / cm 2 or more.
    The disposable absorbent article according to claim 1.
  3.  前記吸収体は、親水性繊維を120~200g/m2、及び高吸収性ポリマー粒子を170~220g/m2含み、前記親水性繊維の含有量よりも前記高吸収性ポリマーの含有量のほうが多い、請求項2記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The absorber includes 120 to 200 g / m 2 of hydrophilic fibers and 170 to 220 g / m 2 of superabsorbent polymer particles, and the content of the superabsorbent polymer is higher than the content of the hydrophilic fibers. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 2, wherein the disposable absorbent article is large.
  4.  前記温度変化物質として、粒子状の温度変化物質が前記ポケット部に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein a particulate temperature change material is incorporated in the pocket portion as the temperature change material.
  5.  前記ポケット部の周囲の、少なくとも前記ポケット部の前端部近傍には、高吸収性ポリマーが、前記吸収体のその他の領域と比較して最も高密度に配置されている、
     請求項4記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
    Around the pocket portion, at least in the vicinity of the front end portion of the pocket portion, the superabsorbent polymer is disposed at the highest density compared to the other regions of the absorber.
    The disposable absorbent article according to claim 4.
  6.  水分との接触により色が変化する排泄インジケータの少なくとも一部が、前記ポケット部と重なるように設けられ、且つ前記温度変化物質は吸湿性を有する、請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein at least a part of the excretion indicator whose color is changed by contact with moisture is provided so as to overlap the pocket part, and the temperature change substance has hygroscopicity.
  7.  前記ポケット部は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の0~40%の範囲に収まるとともに、前後方向長さが物品全長の10~20%、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の25~60%である、請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The pocket portion is within the range of 0 to 40% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side, the length in the longitudinal direction is 10 to 20% of the total length of the article, and the width is 25 to 60% of the total width of the absorber. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5, wherein
  8.  前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%、及び後側に物品全長の25~45%延在しており、
     前記ポケット部は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の25~45%、及び後側に物品全長の20~40%、物品の幅方向中央に沿って延在し、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の25~60%である、
     請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
    The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side and 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the rear side.
    The pocket portion extends from the center in the front-rear direction of the article to 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the front side, 20 to 40% of the total length of the article on the rear side, and extends along the center in the width direction of the article. 25-60% of the total width,
    The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5.
  9.  前記吸収体は、物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の30~48%、及び後側に物品全長の25~45%延在しており、
     前記ポケット部は、前記吸収体の中央領域を取り囲むように環状に形成されており、その線幅が物品全長の5~10%であり、前記中央領域は物品前後方向中央から前側に物品全長の15~35%、及び後側に物品全長の15~35%、物品の幅方向中央に沿って延在し、且つ幅が吸収体の全幅の40~75%である、
     請求項5記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
    The absorbent body extends 30 to 48% of the total length of the article from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side and 25 to 45% of the total length of the article on the rear side.
    The pocket portion is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the central area of the absorbent body, and the line width thereof is 5 to 10% of the total length of the article. The central area extends from the center in the longitudinal direction of the article to the front side of the article. 15 to 35%, and 15 to 35% of the total length of the article on the rear side, extending along the center in the width direction of the article, and the width is 40 to 75% of the total width of the absorbent body.
    The disposable absorbent article according to claim 5.
  10.  前記温度変化物質は、少なくとも平面方向に自由に移動できる状態の粒子状分を有さず、あるいは少量しか有さず、大部分は移動しないように配置されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorption according to claim 3, wherein the temperature-changing substance does not have a particulate portion in a state where it can freely move in at least a plane direction, or has only a small amount, and most of the temperature-changing substance is arranged not to move. Sex goods.
  11. 前記吸収体は全体が包装シートによって包まれているとともに、前記温度変化物質が前記吸収体及び前記包装シートの少なくとも一方に融着されている、請求項10記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 10, wherein the absorbent body is entirely wrapped with a packaging sheet, and the temperature change substance is fused to at least one of the absorbent body and the packaging sheet.
  12.  前記温度変化物質が融着されるとともに、この融着された温度変化物質が砕かれている、請求項11記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 11, wherein the temperature change substance is fused and the fused temperature change substance is crushed.
  13.  前記温度変化物質は、その表面側及び裏面側にそれぞれ位置する表面側部材及び裏面側部材間に挟まれるとともに、その一部が前記表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着し、且つ残部が前記表面側部材及び裏面側部材に融着しておらず、
     前記温度変化物質の融着部分が枠状をなすとともに、その枠状融着部分により囲まれる部分に前記非融着の温度変化物質が封じ込められている、
     請求項10記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。
    The temperature change substance is sandwiched between a front surface side member and a back surface side member positioned on the front surface side and the back surface side, respectively, and a part thereof is fused to the front surface side member and the back surface side member, and the remaining portion is the It is not fused to the front side member and the back side member,
    The fused portion of the temperature change material forms a frame shape, and the non-fused temperature change material is enclosed in a portion surrounded by the frame-like fused portion,
    The disposable absorbent article according to claim 10.
  14.  前記枠状融着部分が多数配列されて格子状パターンをなしており、且つこの格子状パターンは、前記温度変化物質の融着部及び非融着部が交互に列なる点線状の融着線からなり、各交差位置において少なくとも一方の融着線が不連続となっているパターンである、請求項13記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 A plurality of the frame-like fusion parts are arranged to form a lattice-like pattern, and the lattice-like pattern is a dotted-line fusion line in which the fusion parts and non-fusion parts of the temperature change substance are alternately arranged. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 13, which has a pattern in which at least one fusion line is discontinuous at each intersection position.
  15.  前記温度変化物質として、相対的に融点が高い高融点温度変化物質と、相対的に融点が低い低融点温度変化物質とを含有しており、前記枠状融着部分が前記低融点温度変化物質の融着により形成され、且つ前記枠状融着部分により囲まれる部分に前記高融点温度変換物質が前記非融着の温度変化物質として封じ込められている、請求項13記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The temperature changing material contains a high melting point temperature changing material having a relatively high melting point and a low melting point temperature changing material having a relatively low melting point, and the frame-like fused portion is the low melting point temperature changing material. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 13, wherein the high-melting-point temperature converting substance is contained as a non-fused temperature change substance in a part formed by fusing and surrounded by the frame-like fused part.
  16.  前記温度変化物質として、繊維状に形成された温度変化物質が前記ポケット部に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein as the temperature change substance, a temperature change substance formed in a fiber shape is incorporated in the pocket portion.
  17.  前記温度変化物質として、粒子状の温度変化物質を圧縮成形して得られる成形片が、前記ポケット部内に内蔵されている、請求項3記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The disposable absorbent article according to claim 3, wherein a molded piece obtained by compression molding a particulate temperature change substance as the temperature change substance is incorporated in the pocket portion.
  18.  前記成形片は、平均粒径が200~600μm且つ嵩密度が0.50~0.70g/cm3の糖アルコール粒子を嵩密度が0.80~1.10g/cm3となるように圧縮成形して得られる多孔質片である、請求項17記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 The molded piece is formed by compression molding sugar alcohol particles having an average particle size of 200 to 600 μm and a bulk density of 0.50 to 0.70 g / cm 3 so that the bulk density is 0.80 to 1.10 g / cm 3. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 17, which is a porous piece obtained as described above.
  19.  前記成形片は厚みが0.5~2.0mm且つ面積が50~1000mm2で前記ポケット部内に複数あるいは多数存在する扁平片である、請求項18記載の使い捨て吸収性物品。 19. The disposable absorbent article according to claim 18, wherein the molded piece is a flat piece having a thickness of 0.5 to 2.0 mm and an area of 50 to 1000 mm 2 and a plurality or a plurality of pieces in the pocket portion.
PCT/JP2009/056627 2008-04-30 2009-03-31 Disposable absorptive article WO2009133745A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN200980115121.8A CN102014831B (en) 2008-04-30 2009-03-31 Disposable absorptive article

Applications Claiming Priority (8)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2008-119316 2008-04-30
JP2008119316A JP5305725B2 (en) 2008-04-30 2008-04-30 Disposable absorbent article
JP2008119317A JP5502287B2 (en) 2008-04-30 2008-04-30 Disposable absorbent article
JP2008-119317 2008-04-30
JP2008143573A JP4579313B2 (en) 2008-05-30 2008-05-30 Disposable absorbent article
JP2008-143573 2008-05-30
JP2008250839A JP4528853B2 (en) 2008-09-29 2008-09-29 Disposable absorbent article
JP2008-250839 2008-09-29

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2009133745A1 true WO2009133745A1 (en) 2009-11-05

Family

ID=41254968

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2009/056627 WO2009133745A1 (en) 2008-04-30 2009-03-31 Disposable absorptive article

Country Status (3)

Country Link
KR (1) KR101553428B1 (en)
CN (1) CN102014831B (en)
WO (1) WO2009133745A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2415436A4 (en) * 2009-03-31 2012-11-28 Unicharm Corp Absorptive article
EP2658497A2 (en) * 2010-12-28 2013-11-06 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article with stimulation composite

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
MY174506A (en) * 2012-04-25 2020-04-23 Zuiko Corp Disposable worn article and method for producing same
JP5946801B2 (en) * 2013-07-26 2016-07-06 ユニ・チャーム株式会社 Disposable diapers
JP7374768B2 (en) * 2017-12-15 2023-11-07 王子ホールディングス株式会社 Disposable diapers and methods of manufacturing disposable diapers

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2006071524A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-07-06 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article featuring a temperature change member
JP3830901B2 (en) * 2001-05-14 2006-10-11 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Disposable absorbent article having temperature change element
WO2007044162A1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2007-04-19 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article featuring a temperature change member
JP3922722B2 (en) * 1994-12-22 2007-05-30 キンバリー クラーク ワールドワイド インコーポレイテッド Toilet training aids that cause temperature changes

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP3922722B2 (en) * 1994-12-22 2007-05-30 キンバリー クラーク ワールドワイド インコーポレイテッド Toilet training aids that cause temperature changes
JP3830901B2 (en) * 2001-05-14 2006-10-11 ザ プロクター アンド ギャンブル カンパニー Disposable absorbent article having temperature change element
WO2006071524A1 (en) * 2004-12-29 2006-07-06 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article featuring a temperature change member
WO2007044162A1 (en) * 2005-10-07 2007-04-19 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article featuring a temperature change member

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP2415436A4 (en) * 2009-03-31 2012-11-28 Unicharm Corp Absorptive article
EP2658497A2 (en) * 2010-12-28 2013-11-06 Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. Absorbent article with stimulation composite
KR20130132883A (en) * 2010-12-28 2013-12-05 킴벌리-클라크 월드와이드, 인크. Absorbent article with stimulation composite
EP2658497A4 (en) * 2010-12-28 2015-02-25 Kimberly Clark Co Absorbent article with stimulation composite
KR101872048B1 (en) 2010-12-28 2018-07-31 킴벌리-클라크 월드와이드, 인크. Absorbent article with stimulation composite

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN102014831A (en) 2011-04-13
KR101553428B1 (en) 2015-09-15
CN102014831B (en) 2013-08-21
KR20110013439A (en) 2011-02-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP2241299B1 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP5075980B2 (en) Absorbent article and sanitary napkin
EP1862156B1 (en) Absorbent articles
WO2016047320A1 (en) Method for forming stretchable structure for absorbent article and stretchable structure for absorbent article
WO2009133745A1 (en) Disposable absorptive article
JP5250708B2 (en) Disposable diapers
JP5096183B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP4528853B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP5283462B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP5297777B2 (en) Absorbent articles
JP4536814B2 (en) Disposable diapers
JP5191250B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP2010081954A5 (en)
JP5305725B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP2010068989A5 (en)
JP4579313B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP4452746B2 (en) Disposable diapers
JP2009172370A5 (en)
JP4435240B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP5502287B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
JP2009034270A (en) Disposable diaper
JP2009207564A5 (en)
JP4394719B2 (en) Disposable absorbent article
KR101527425B1 (en) Disposable diaper
JP2009160130A5 (en)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 200980115121.8

Country of ref document: CN

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 09738682

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 8292/DELNP/2010

Country of ref document: IN

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20107026975

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 09738682

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1